IS-310400 IDS-iSYS

(Multi-Discipline Automated System)

User Manual
Software version V 14

For further assistance,

please contact IDS Technical Support:
Tel: 0191 519 6153
Fax: 0191 519 0760
Email: [email protected]

IDS France , 42, rue Stéphane Mazeau, 21320 POUILLY-EN-AUXOIS, FRANCE

IDS Ltd 10 Didcot Way, Boldon Business Park,

Boldon, Tyne and Wear, NE35 9PD
Tel: 0191 519 0660
 Preface
This instruction manual is to be used in conjunction with the
in vitro diagnostic analyser and must be read before
installing or using the analyser.

in vitro diagnostic analyser must only be used by

personnel trained by approved IDS staff.
The purpose of the user manual is to explain:
• The way the analyser works.
• How to use it in routine working practice.
• The preventive maintenance required.

Revision M1 of the User Manual was produced on the 21st December 2015, for the software
version:
V 14.04
The information contained in this document is applicable to any subsequent software version identified as «V
14.XX». Changes with the decimals of the version identifier are used to account for minor software
enhancements, concerning neither the features nor the use of the system.
The manual comprises the following sections and appendices:

Section 1: Operating Principle

Section 2: User Interface Software
Section 3: Use
Section 4: Messages
Section 5: Maintenance
Section 6: Problems And Corrective Action
Section 7: System Configuration
Appendix I: Waste Disposal
Appendix II: Decontaminating The Analyser
Appendix III: Disposal Of The Analyser
Appendix IV: IDS-iSYS Cuvettes
Appendix V: Sample barcode symbology managed by the system
Appendix VI: Analyser long stoppage period

Attached document: Protocol for connection, revision N1

If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided

! by the equipment may be impaired.

If the recommendations contained in this manual are not respected, the level of performance
offered by the analyser may be impaired and the results generated may be incorrect.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 P1

Software version V 14
 Preface
New in the manual Revision M1
Section 1
• Modification in Characteristics, pages 7 to 9.
• Modification in 1-1-6-Precautions for use, page 15: use of the sample type «Other» in immunoassays.

Section 2
• Modification in 2-3-1-FILE Menu, page 25: adding of a new feature accessible from this menu.
• Modification in 2-3-4-MAINTENANCE Menu, page 28: adding of a new automatic maintenance accessible
from this menu
• Modification in 2-3-5-SETUP Menu, page 30: adding of a new feature accessible from this menu.

Section 3
• Modification in 3-3-1-Installation of internal ancillary reagents, page 47 and in 3-3-2-Installation of
external ancillary reagents, page 48: adding of automatic priming of ancillary reagents.
• Modification in 3-4-System Performance Checks, pages 42 and following: programming the automatic
qualification profile now in section 7.
• Adding of 3-5-1-Programming calibrations, page 55: new display options in the calibrations/controls
window.
• Modification in 3-7-Programming Samples, pages 69 and following: use of the sample type «Other» in
immunoassays.
• Adding of 3-8-6-Performing reflex tests, page 76.
• Adding of 3-8-7-Performing dilutions, page 77: post dilutions carried out on user request.
• Modification in 3-10-1-Result of a calibration, page 84: the validation criteria «calibrator CV in RLU» is
modified.
• Modification in 3-10-3-Sample results, page 87: change in the reporting of results outside the measuring
range; adding of reflex test launch.
• Modification in 3-10-4-Work list results, pages 87 and 88: adding of reflex test launch.
• Modification in 3-11-Messages associated with results, pages 89 and following: adding of the messages
RFX and AIN; modification of messages OMR- and OMR+.
• Modification in 3-12-Results Storage, pages 93 and 94: storage of incomplete profiles and removal of
stored profiles
• Modification in 3-13-1-Cumulative analysis, pages 95 and following: modification in Levey-Jennings
access.
• Modification in 3-14-1-Emptying the solid waste, page 101: use of disposable container.

Section 4
• Modification in 4-3-Messages associated with results, pages 108 and following: adding of the messages
RFX and AIN; modification of messages OMR- and OMR+.

Section 5
• Adding of 5-4-13-2-Cleaning the probe, page 145.

Section 7
• Adding of Section 7: System Configuration, pages 151 and following.

Appendices
• Modification in A-6- Analyser long stoppage period, pages A-8 and following.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 P2

Software version V 14
 Preface
New features in the software version V 14.04
• The system allows reflex testing: tests can be defined with a Supervisor level of access and can be carried
out either automatically or on request.
• Ancillary solutions IDS-iSYS TRIGGER A & B, IDS-iSYS WASH S and IDS-iSYS DSORB are now
automatically primed when installed in the system.
• Incomplete patient profiles can now be stored together with the completed profiles. In this case, the
analysis requests that have not been performed are automatically removed.
• The results calculated outside the measuring range are now interpreted in relation to the limits of the
measuring range.
• The number of available tests is now indicated on Immunology cartridges common to several analytes (eg
CCS cartridge). The minimum and the maximum numbers of available tests are displayed next to the
icon.
• The pubertal development stage (Tanner stage) can now be defined in the patient identification tab. This
data is transferred using the connection protocol «ASTM Compatible V3».
• The qualification profile tests are no longer displayed in the calibrations/controls window.
• New display options are available in the calibrations/controls window.
• The criteria for automatic validation of Immunoassay calibrations are modified: a specific limit can now be
applied to the CV calculated on the RLU of each calibrator. This CV may also be excluded from the
calibration validation criteria.
• A new criteria is now applied to Immunoassays calibrated without master curve: it allows verifying the
difference between the target and the calculated value of each calibrator.
• The validity of an expired calibration can be extended one day.
• CV calculated with raw data of each control is now displayed on the first tab of calibration for
immunoassays measured by spectrophotometer.
• An identifier entered for a calibrator or control is recorded by the system. When this ID is used again, the
lot data are automatically associated.
• In the CONSUMABLES menu, the filling of the solid waste is now displayed proportional to a maximal
capacity of 400 cuvettes.
• Post-dilutions can be performed either automatically or on request.
• An automatic maintenance, requested by infectious disease assays, is automatically performed when the
system is placed in standby mode.
• In the reference tables of analytical configuration, it is no longer mandatory to define an interval that does
not generate a message.
• The connection protocol « ASTM Compatible V3» is added:
• transfer the identifier of the operator who validates the profile.
• transfer the Tanner stage.
• The system can now be connected to the centralised computer via an Ethernet link.
• Access to the Levey-Jennings menu is simplified.
• The function for updating the analytical configuration is now integrated to the user’s interface.
• Biochemistry assay setup is modified: modification in step configuration (compatible with previous versions
without modifying the analytical process).

Issues in software package V14.04

• Using Westgard Rules, when a calibration has failed, a normal WE! Error message is attached to the results. When the
calibration is then restarted and been successful, normally the WE! error message should disappear. That is not the
case in this software version, the flag is still wrongly displayed on control results but not on patient profile results
• Using Westgard Rules, in the case of a calibration with two levels of controls violating a rule (WE! Error message), only
the first control level is displayed on the Westgard graph and in the table of values.
• When a calibration curve is displayed, only the control level 1 is shown on the curve. Other control levels must be
selected each time to be displayed.
• An error message displays each time a Levey-Jennings graph is displayed for a control that does not have a target
value defined. This error message must be accepted prior to select the appropriate graphic representation (mean/
deviation).
• When restoring a high volume database, the option «Stored results» for a partial restoring cannot be used. Full
restoring or the other options for partial restoring can be used.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 P3

Software version V 14
 Preface
Issues in software package V 14.04 (continued)
• In the Storage menu displayed in standard mode, when the transfer to the LIS of a patient profile is requested while
one of multiple replicate results is selected, this selected result is not sent with the profile results. The relevant profile
must be selected to ensure sending of the complete profile.
• In certain cases, assays schedule to a first cartridge but not complete, may remain in error (red tick) despite a second
cartridge of the same lot being on-board. The first cartridge may also not be fully used. In this case, the run cycle must
be stopped and the relevant assays must be deselected (uncheck the box) prior to be selected again.
• Rounding at 0.1 mAbs may be different for the same result.
• When two analytes use the same cartridge, the number of available tests can be incorrect. In this case, all assays
requested for the two analytes will be carried out.
• The blue contour is applied only to removable racks in the sample compartment.
• A countdown before use may not resume when the cartridge is removed less than 5 minutes. In this case, a new
countdown begins.
• The status of a faulty calibration is not updated when excluding one of the calibrator replicates during a run. Patient
results and controls are calculated. The calibration status will be updated once the run cycle is stopped.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 P4

Software version V 14
 Preface
List of symbols used on the analyser

Manufacturer.

In vitro diagnostic medical device.

Consult the instructions for use.

Caution recommended: see Safety Precautions.

Risk of biological contamination.

Risk of crushing injury.

Electrical and electronic waste.

Dispose of in accordance with current country-
specific laws.

High temperature.

Risk of hand injury.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 P5

Software version V 14
 Table of Contents

Section 1 Operating principle 1

1-1- Field of Use 2

1-2- General Overview 3
1-3- Characteristics 7
1-4- Installation 10
1-4-1- Environment 10
1-4-2- Electricity supply 11
1-4-3- Connections 11
1-5- Operating principles 12
1-5-1- Luminescence measurements 12
1-5-2- Absorbancy measurements 12
1-5-3- Immunoassays 13
1-5-4- Biochemistry assays 14
1-6- Precautions for Use 15
1-6-1- General precautions 15
1-6-2- Special precautions 16
1-6-3- Safety precautions 16

Section 2 User Interface Software 17

2-1- Structure of the Software 18

2-2- Main Screen 19
2-3- Menus 25
2-3-1- FILE Menu 25
2-3-2- SESSIONS menu 26
2-3-3- DATA menu 27
2-3-4- MAINTENANCE menu 28
2-3-4- MAINTENANCE menu (continued) 29
2-3-5- SETUP menu 30
2-3-6- MANAGEMENT OF LOTS menu 31
2-3-7- HELP menu 32
2-4- Functions keys 33

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Table of Contents i

Software version V 14
 Table of Contents
Section 3 Use 34

Information on the lid opening 35

3-1- Start up 37
3-1-1- Initial Start up 37
3-1-2- Start up from standby mode 37
3-2- Installation of Reagents 38
3-2-1- Colour codes associated with reagent positions in the reagent compartment 43
3-2-2- Information displayed with reagents 43
3-2-3- Management of on board reagents 44
3-3- Installation of Ancillary Reagents 46
3-3-1- Installation of internal ancillary reagents 47
3-3-2- Installation of external ancillary reagents 48
3-3-3- Installation of IDS-iSYS cuvettes 50
3-4- System Performance Checks (Immunoassay only) 52
3-4-1- Programming the qualification profile 52
3-4-2- Management of results 53
3-5- Programming Calibrations and Controls 55
3-5-1- Programming calibrations 55
3-5-2- Programming Quality Controls 58
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment 60
3-6-1- Removable trays 61
3-6-2- Fixed tray 64
3-6-3- Configure a position without barcode 65
3-6-4- End of loading 66
3-6-5- Colour codes associated with sample positions 67
3-6-6- Colour codes associated with removable trays 67
3-6-7- Colour codes associated with position contour 68
3-7- Programming Samples 69
3-8- Assays 70
3-8-1- Performing assays 70
3-8-2- Adding samples during an assay 71
3-8-3- Adding or replacing a reagent during an assay 72
3-8-4- Releasing an alarm during an assay 73
3-8-5- Unloading samples during an assay 75
3-8-6- Performing reflex tests 76
3-8-7- Performing dilutions 77
3-9- Adding an Emergency (STAT) Sample 79
3-10- Results 80
3-10-1- Result of a calibration 81
3-10-2- Result of controls 85
3-10-3- Sample results 86
3-10-4- Work list results 87
3-11- Messages Associated with Results 89
3-12- Results Storage 93
3-13- Quality Control Management 95
3-13-1- Cumulative analysis 95
3-13-2- Westgard rules 98
3-14- Switching The Analyser Off 100
3-14-1- Emptying the solid waste 101
3-14-2- Emptying the liquid waste 102
3-15- Switching The Analyser Off Completely 103

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Table of Contents ii

Software version V 14
 Table of Contents
Section 4 Messages 104

4-1- Messages Associated with Calibrations 105

4-2- Messages Associated with Calibration Controls 107
4-3- Messages Associated with Results 108
4-4- Warning Messages 112
4-5- Error Messages 113

Section 5 Maintenance 114

5-1- Daily Maintenance 115

5-1-1- General Maintenance 116
5-1-1-1- Checking reagent drawer and Plexiglas® 116
5-1-1-2- Checking sample drawer and Plexiglas® 116
5-1-1-3- Cleaning needle exterior 117
5-1-1-4- Decontamination of the probe 117
5-2- Weekly Maintenance 118
5-2-1- General Maintenance 119
5-2-1-1- Cleaning the reagent compartment and Plexiglas® 119
5-2-1-2- Cleaning the sample tray and Plexiglas® 119
5-2-1-3- Cleaning the rinsing well 120
5-2-1-4- Checking dilutors and IDS-iSYS System Liquid pumps 120
5-2-2- Immunoassay Maintenance 121
5-2-2-1- Rinsing of the IDS-iSYS Triggers tubing 121
5-3- Monthly Maintenance 122
5-3-1- General Maintenance 122
5-3-1-1- Cleaning the IDS-iSYS System Liquid pump shafts 122
5-3-1-2- Cleaning the liquid waste pump shaft 122
5-3-1-3- Cleaning the IDS-iSYS D-Sorb pump and level sensor shafts 123
5-3-1-4- Cleaning the liquid waste level sensor 123
5-3-1-5- Checking lamp references 124
5-3-1-6- Switch off the instrument! 124
5-3-2- Immunoassay Maintenance 124
5-3-2-1- Cleaning the IDS-iSYS Wash Solution pump and level sensor shafts 124
5-3-2-2- Rinsing of the AP Substrate tubing 125
5-4- Analyser Interventions 126
5-4-1- Replacement of lamp 126
5-4-2- Replacement of probe 127
5-4-3- Replacement of primary fuses 128
5-4-4- Replacement of secondary fuses 129
5-4-5- Replacement of IDS-iSYS Wash Solution pump (Immunoassay) 130
5-4-6- Replacement of IDS-iSYS System Liquid pump 130
5-4-7- Replacement of liquid waste pump 130
5-4-8- Replacement of IDS-iSYS D-Sorb pump 131
5-4-9- Removal of the on-board IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube 131
5-4-10- Adjustment of probe reference position 132
5-4-10-1- Adjustment procedure for analyser without lid locking system 133
5-4-10-2- Adjustment procedure for analyser with lid locking system 136
5-4-11- Unclogging the sampling probe 141
5-4-12- Intervention in System Configuration menu 143

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Table of Contents iii

Software version V 14
 Table of Contents
Section 5 Maintenance (continued)

5-4-13- Repeat an automatic maintenance 145

5-4-13-1- Washer needle cleaning 145
5-4-13-2- Cleaning the probe 145
5-5- Analyser Cleaning 146
5-5-1- Decontaminating the containers of solid and liquid waste 147

Section 6 Problems & Corrective Action 148

6-1 Resolving Errors in Cartridge Check System (CCS) 149

Section 7 System Configuration 151

7-1- Programming the automatic qualification profile! 152

7-2- Creating the reflex tests! 153
7-2-1- Creating a new rule! 154
7-2-2- Launch option of reflex tests! 156
7-2-3- Modifying an existing rule! 157
7-2-4- Importing/exporting rules! 157
7-2-5- Removing a rule! 157
7-3- Configuring the print settings! 158
7-4- Options of validating and transferring the results! 159
7-5- User management! 160
7-6- Updating the analytical configuration! 162

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Table of Contents iv

Software version V 14
 Table of Contents

Appendices A1

A-1 Waste Disposal A2

A-2 Decontaminating the Analyser A3
Cleaning/Decontaminating Declaration A4
A-3 Disposal of the Analyser A5
A-4 IDS-iSYS Cuvettes A6
A4-1 List of symbols used on the IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube A6
A4-2 Storage of the IDS-iSYS Cuvette cubes A6
A-5 Sample barcode symbology managed by the system A7
A-6- Analyser long stoppage period A8
A6-1-Less than14 days A8
A6-2-Between 15 and 30 days A 10
A6-3-Analyser start up after a long stoppage period A 13

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Table of Contents v

Software version V 14
SECTION
1:
Operating
principle
 Section 1
Operating principle 1

1-1- Field of Use 2

1-2- General Overview 3
1-3- Characteristics 7
1-4- Installation 10
1-4-1- Environment 10
1-4-2- Electricity supply 11
1-4-3- Connections 11
1-5- Operating principles 12
1-5-1- Luminescence measurements 12
1-5-2- Absorbancy measurements 12
1-5-3- Immunoassays 13
1-5-4- Biochemistry assays 14
1-6- Precautions for Use 15
1-6-1- General precautions 15
1-6-2- Special precautions 16
1-6-3- Safety precautions 16

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 1

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-1- Field of Use

1-1- Field of Use

is an in vitro diagnostic analyser. It enables Immunoassay and Biochemistry assays to be
carried out on a single analytical platform:
• Immunoassay.
• Bone and Growth.
• Infectious Diseases.
• Hypertension.
• Autoimmunity.

• Biochemistry.
• Substrates.
• Enzymes.
• Electrolytes.
• Specific Proteins.

The analyser is intended for professional use and must only be used by trained personnel
working in compliance with the precautions for use set out in this manual (see Section 1-6-1, page 15) and
good laboratory practice (GLP).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-1 2

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-2- General Overview

1-2- General Overview

is an in vitro diagnostic analyser. It enables assays using different systems of detection to be
carried out on a single analytical platform: luminescence and spectrophotometry, applied to the different fields
of clinical biology, Immunoassays and Biochemistry.
The analyser can support Immunoassays based on the principle of chemiluminescence as well as assays using
an enzymatic detection.
The analyser enables the complete automation for Immunoassays and Biochemistry tests.
Individual assays are carried out in disposable cuvettes which are automatically loaded onto a carousel.
Asynchronous management allows each cuvette to be processed individually and transferred to the relevant
reaction modules positioned around the carousel.
The cuvette is able to ensure compatibility in both fields. The measurements specific to each principle are
carried out directly in the reaction cuvette:
• Luminescence measurements carried out in the luminometer.
• Absorbency measurements carried out continuously by the spectrophotometer.

Designed for continuous loading, the analyser works on a sample-by-sample basis.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-2 3

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-2- General Overview (continued)

With all modules fitted the analyser comprises the following key components:

3 7

1 5 4

1. A refrigerated reagent compartment, consisting of 15 rails containing the Immunoassay or Biochemistry

racks as well as a specialised rack for chronometric reagents.
2. A compartment for samples , calibrators and controls with, depending on the analyser configuration, a
fixed sample tray with 64 positions , or a rack containing 6 removable trays each with 20 positions.
3. A pipetting arm that pipettes both reagents and samples.
4. A thermo-regulated carousel set at 37°C with 90 positions for disposable cuvettes. Incorporated into the
carousel is the spectrophotometer, used for measuring absorbancy from certain Immunoassay,
Biochemistry and Turbidimetry reactions.
5. A sedimentation module for magnetic particles.
6. An automatic cuvette loader, holding 960 cuvettes at a time (pre-formed as a cube).
7. A luminometer measuring luminescence in Immunoassay reactions (Immunoassay version).
8. Four washers for washing magnetic particles.

The barcode reader integrated into the reagent compartment identifies reagent cartridges supplied by IDS.
A second barcode reader, located on the front of the analyser identifies ancillary reagents.
Samples, calibrators and controls are identified or by the reader located on the front for analysers with a fixed
sample tray, either by a reader integrated into the sample compartment for analysers with removable sample
trays.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-2 4

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-2- General Overview (continued)

For the fixed-tray configuration, each position is equipped with a detection sensor. Samples are identified by
the barcode reader (on the front) prior to loading the sample, or manually programmed after sample loading.

For the removable-tray configuration, the tray and each of its positions are identified when loading by the
integrated barcode reader.

Configuration with removable sample trays

The reagent cartridges are stored in the refrigerated reagent compartment between 12 and 15°C while the
analyser is operating and between either 8 and 10°C or 12 and 15°C in standby mode (depending on the
analyser configuration).
Depending on the configuration of the analyser, up to 15 Immunoassay parameters can be programmed
simultaneously or up to 36 Biochemistry parameters or a combination of both, up to the maximum number of
positions available.
For Immunoassays, the analyser only uses reagents supplied by IDS and its partners. For Biochemistry, it is
possible to use reagents available from suppliers other than IDS, however these reagents will not be managed
using the barcode system, and the information required for traceability must be manually programmed by the
operator.

When Biochemistry regents available from third-party suppliers are used, IDS takes no responsibility for the
validity of results obtained. It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure any non-IDS reagents are optimised
and validated for use on the analyser.

IDS Specification
Site de POUILLY Rack Sample M

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-2 5

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-2- General Overview (continued)

Samples and reagents are aspirated using a probe equipped to detect liquid level using capacitance. The
sample and reagents are pipetted in accordance with the validated parameters for each assay and transferred
into a cuvette where the reaction takes place. Between each sample, the probe is rinsed internally and
externally in order to eliminate any risk of contamination.
Immunoassays:
The cuvettes are transferred to the washer module where magnets hold the solid phase (magnetic particles)
whilst washing takes place.
When the reaction is over, depending on the type of the assay, the cuvette is either transferred to the
luminometer for chemiluminescence assays or kept in the carousel for enzymatic assays.
For chemiluminescence assays, trigger reagents are added to produce luminescence.
For enzymatic assays, substrate is added and the photometric changes are measured continuously by the
spectrophotometer.
When measurement is complete, cuvettes are automatically ejected into a re-usable solid waste tray.

Biochemistry assays:
Photometric changes taking place in the reaction are measured continuously by the spectrophotometer.
The analyser is connected to a computer via an Ethernet link.
The software is able to program the analyser workload and carry out the following functions:
• Management of lots of reagents, calibrators and controls.
• Quality controls (Levey-Jennings and Westgard).
• Management of ancillary reagents.
• Operator traceability.
• Transfer of results to a centralised computer system.
• Printing, storing and traceability of results.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-2 6

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-3- Characteristics

1-3- Characteristics
Analyser
System • Multidiscipline Immunoassay and Biochemistry analyser.
• Continuous loading.
• Configuration:
• Immunoassay (4 washers) + Biochemistry.

Analyser Physical • Analyser dimensions: L 105 cm x H 70 cm x W 75 cm.

Characteristics • Overall dimensions: L 124 cm x H 110 cm x W 71 cm.
• Weight: 103 kg.
• Basis weight: 130 kg/m2
• Sound level: 55 dB (average in run cycle); up to 66 dB
• Emitted heat: up to 530 W (1808 BTU/h or 16,5 cal/s)
• Computer System: L 60 cm x H 40 cm x W 50 cm.
Throughput • Immunoassay Up to 120 tests/hour (Assay dependent)*.
• Biochemistry 240 tests/hour.
* According to configuration.

Number of tests on board • 15 Immunoassay.

• Up to 50 Biochemistry.
Immunoassay detection • Chemiluminescence (luminometer).
• Enzymatic assays (spectrophotometer)

Biochemistry detection • Colorimetric and enzymatic assays.

• Turbidimetric assays.
Samples • Serum, plasma or urine.
• Primary tubes 5 mL (13 x 75 mm), 7 mL (13 x 100 mm).
10 mL (16 x 75 mm).
• Secondary tubes (13 x 75 mm).
• Cups (ref. IS-CSC105 and ref. IS-CSC115).
• Depending on the configuration, positions for samples, calibrators and
controls:
• Fixed tray : 64 positions
• Removable trays : 20 positions per tray. Up to 6 trays on board.
Possibility of special tray for calibrator and control vials (16 positions
for 2ml vials, diameter 18 mm).
• Liquid level detection by capacitance.
• Clot detection.
• Dilutions and automatic pre-treatments.

Barcode readers • Reader on front face for barcode identification of cuvettes and ancillary
reagents. Used for sample identification in fixed tray configuration.
• Integrated reader for reagents barcode
• For configuration with removable trays, reader integrated into the
sample compartment.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-3 7

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-3- Characteristics (continued)

Reagent compartment • 15 rails, each of which can hold:

• 1 x Immunoassay cartridge.
• 3 x 50 mL Biochemistry Reagent.
• 6 x 20 mL (or 5 mL) Biochemistry Reagent.
• Storage at 12-15°C whilst operating.
• Internal storage between 12-15°C or 8-10°C* in standby mode.
* Depending on the analyser configuration
Sample volume (µL) • Immunoassay: from 4 to 300 µL.
• Biochemistry: from 4 to 50 µL.
• Programmable in steps of 0.5 µL.
Reagent volume (µL) • Immunoassay: from 10 to 400 µL.
• Biochemistry: from 10 to 400 µL.
• Programmable in units of 1 µL.
Reaction volume (µL) • Immunoassay : up to 500 µl
• Biochemistry: from 180 to 550 µL.
Pipetting system • Pipetting reagents and samples by probe.
• Liquid level detection by capacitance.
• Preheating of reagents/samples.
• Internal and external rinsing between each pipetting of sample.
Spectrophotometer • Linearity: Up to 3 Abs.
• Optic path of cuvettes: 0.8 cm.
• Spectrophotometer with interferential filter wheel:
• 6 wavelengths available: 340, 405, 500, 540, 580 and 620 nm.
• Light source: Halogen lamp.
• Spectrophotometer with LEDs:
• 12 wavelengths interferential filters: 340, 405, 450, 500, 540, 550,

580, 620, 650, 700, 720 and 750 nm.

• Light sources: multiple LEDs.

Luminometer • Wavelengths: from 300 to 500 nm.

• Linearity: Up to 10 Million RLU.
Reaction carousel • Thermo regulated at 37°C.
• 90 positions for disposable cuvettes.
• Automatic cuvette supply by cuvette loader.

Cuvette loader • Loader for cube of cuvettes.

• Contains 960 disposable cuvettes.
• Preheated loader.
Common liquid consumables • IDS-iSYS System Liquid (5 litre containers).
• IDS-iSYS Wash (10 litre containers).
• IDS-iSYS D-Sorb (1 litre containers).
• Immunoassay only:
• IDS-iSYS Triggers A & B (250 mL each).
• AP Substrate Chemiluminescence substrate (500 mL) *
* Depending on the analyser configuration

Waste collection • 10 liters container for liquid waste posing a biological risk.
• Solid waste (cuvettes) disposed of in re-usable container.
Power supply • Voltage: 100 - 240 V.
• Frequency: 50 - 60 Hertz.
• Maximum power consumed: 750 VA.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-3 8

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-3- Characteristics (continued)

Computer system: Minimum configuration required

Operating system • Windows XP Pro Service Pack 2.
• Windows Vista Service Pack 1.
• Windows 7.
• Windows 8.
Microprocessor • Type Sempron 3100 or equivalent.
• Windows 7: 1 gigahertz (GHz) or faster 32-bit (x86) or 64 bits (x64)
processor
Live memory • 4 Gb.
• Windows 7: 4 gigabyte (GB) RAM (32-bit) or 4 GB RAM (64-bit).
Hard disk • 80 Gb.
• Windows 7: 16 GB available hard disk space (32-bit) or 20 GB (64-bit).
Ethernet • 2 independent Ethernet network adaptors.
Ports • USB ports (min 2 one of which at front).
• Serial port for connection to centralised computer system.
Input devices • Keyboard (country specific).
• Mouse.
Screen • Monitor. Speakers integrated.
Screen resolution • 1024 x 768 pixels.
Peripherals • Reader – CD writer.
• Windows 7: DirectX 9 graphics device with WDDM 1.0 or higher driver.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-3 9

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-4- Installation

1-4- Installation
The packaging of the has been designed to prevent any damage occurring during
transportation.
The analyser can be stored in its original packaging under the following conditions:
• Storage temperature 10-40°C.
• Relative humidity 80% non condensing.

In the event of prolonged storage, the analyser performance must be checked. The unpacking, installation and
initial qualification of the analyser must only be carried out by a qualified IDS representative.

After installation by Technical Services or an IDS representative, do not handle or move the

! analyser.
If the analyser must be moved, contact Technical Services or IDS representative.

1-4-1- Environment
A satisfactory installation site is essential for the analyser to function correctly.
The user must ensure compliance with the conditions required in terms of environment and electricity supply in
order to maintain the performance of the analyser and to guarantee safe use for the operator.
Environmental conditions required:
• The analyser must not be exposed to direct light.
• A clean and ventilated air environment.
• The analyser must be placed on a flat work surface, capable of supporting its weight (103 kg) without
significant vibration.
• The surrounding temperature must be between 15°C and 30°C.
• Relative humidity must be within 20 and 80% (non-condensing).
• The analyser must not be installed under an air-conditioning unit.
• Clearance of at least 15 cm must be provided at the rear, front, left and right of the analyser to allow
evacuation of heat produced by the apparatus.
• The analyser must be installed in such as way as to allow the user to easily access the ON/OFF button and
the main cable inlet.
• The analyser must not be installed near strong sources of electromagnetic radiation and electrical
interference (e.g. refrigerators).

The IVD medical device complies with the emission and immunity requirements described in the standard
IEC61326-2-6.
Physical characteristics of the analyser:
• Dimensions of the analyser L 105 x H 70 x W 75 cm.
• Overall dimensions L 124 x H 110 x W 71 cm.
• Weight 103 kg.
• Basis weight 130 kg/m2 *
• Computer system L 60 x H 40 x W 50 cm.

* Analyser only. Basis weight of analyser and its special table: 278 kg/m2

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-4 10

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-4- Installation (continued)

1-4-2- Electricity supply

The electricity supply must meet the following conditions:
• Voltage 100 - 240 V.
• Frequency 50 - 60 Hz.
• Maximum power consumed 750 VA.

If necessary, the installation of a regulated electrical supply may be required by IDS Technical Services.

In order to ensure the analyser’s electrical safety (in accordance with standards), it is essential

! to check that the analyser and its associated peripheral computer equipment (external printer
and computer) are properly earthed.

1-4-3- Connections
Fluidic connections
The fluidic connections are located on the right hand side of the analyser. The tubing is identified by a colour
code.
Description Colour code Field

IDS-iSYS System Liquid White. All.

IDS-iSYS Wash Solution Blue. Immunoassay.
Liquid Waste Red. All.
IDS-iSYS D-Sorb Black. All.
AP Substrate Green Immunoassay*.
* Depending on the analyser configuration
• Connect the tubing corresponding to the colour code to the right hand side of the analyser by applying a
quarter turn to the screw.
• Install the tubing into each of the respective containers.
• Connect the volume detection devices for IDS-iSYS Wash, IDS-iSYS D-Sorb Solution, Liquid Waste and, if
relevant, for AP substrate.

Electrical connections
The electrical connections are located on the left hand side of the analyser.
• Connect the Ethernet cable (RJ 45, 8 pins) between the analyser and the PC (local network).
• Connect the mains supply cable.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-4 11

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-5- Operating principles

1-5- Operating principles

Depending on the type of analysis, the uses the following measurement principles:

• Luminescence measurements carried out in the luminometer.

• Absorbancy measurements carried out continuously by the spectrophotometer.

Depending on the type of the assay, Immunoassays using the chemiluminescence method are measured by
the luminometer and by the spectrophotometer for enzymatic detection assays.
BIochemistry assays are measured by the spectrophometer.

1-5-1- Luminescence measurements

By-products of luminescent acridinium esters are used as detection markers (DMAE - dimethylethanolamine).
The acridinium esters emit light after reacting with hydrogen peroxide and an alkaline solution. IDS-iSYS
Trigger A contains hydrogen peroxide in a dilute acid medium, and IDS-iSYS Trigger B contains a solution of
dilute sodium hydroxide. The analyser automatically injects trigger solutions A and B into the reaction cuvette,
which results in the oxidation of the ester into an excited form. The return to a stable state is accompanied by
the emission of light which is measured and is expressed in relative light units (RLU) by the luminometer
integrated in the analyser.

1-5-2- Absorbancy measurements

Photometric measurements are carried out in the reaction cuvette (maximum interval between two consecutive
measurements is 25 seconds).
These measurements are carried out at the wavelength specific to the analysis, defined in the parameters.
In monochromatic light and at constant temperature, the relationship between absorbancy (or optical density -
OD) and the concentration of the analyte is provided by the BEER-LAMBERT law:
I0
OD = ε l C with OD = Log
I
Where:
• I0 Light flow at cuvette entrance.
• I Light flow at cuvette exit.
• ε Molar extinction coefficient of the analyte (in L.mol -1.cm -1).
• l Optical pathway (cm).
• C Concentration of analyte (Mol.L-1).

Absorbancies are measured with an optical pathway of 0.8 cm and corrected for an optical pathway of 1 cm.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-5 12

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-5- Operating principles (continued)

1-5-3- Immunoassays
Assays are carried out using either a one-site or two-site method.
One-site (competitive) method assay
The assay is based on competition between an unknown quantity of analyte in a sample with the labelled
analyte in the kit.
In a sample where no analyte is present, maximum binding of the labelled analyte is possible. With the
increasing analyte concentrations, decreasing binding of labelled analyte is observed.
The signal generated by the labelled analyte in the luminometer is therefore inversely proportional to the
concentration of analyte in the sample.

Two-site (sandwich) method assay

This technique uses two antibodies that detect and bind different portions of the analyte molecule. Incubation
of these antibodies with the sample results in the formation of a ‘sandwich’ complex, where the analyte is
specifically bound by both antibodies. Incubation with coated magnetic particles allows capture of these
complexes.
For chemilumescence assays, after washing, the cuvette is transferred to luminometer where trigger solutions
are injected into the reaction cuvette. For enzyme-luminescence detection assays, after washing, the substrate
is added into the cuvette then transferred to the luminometer.
For enzymatic assays, after washing, the substrate is added into the reaction cuvette where the reaction takes
place. Increases in absorbancy are monitored by the spectrophotometer.
The signal generated by detection of the captured complexes is directly proportional to the concentration of
analyte in the sample.

Calculation of results
The results are calculated in comparison to a calibration curve.
The specific reference curve (master curve) for a reagent lot is in the file containing all the data for that lot, that
is provided on the CD accompanying the cartridge. This information is registered in the analyser’s database
when the CD is introduced on the controlling computer.
If a new reagent lot is used, this curve must be registered on the database and then adjusted by a 2 point
calibration before sample results can be calculated.

2 point calibration
Analyser-to-analyser variation and different reagent lots will require adjustment of the master curve
(calibration). This is done by assaying two calibrators supplied with the reagent cartridge. The analyser’s
software will automatically perform the data processing to generate a new curve by defining new values for
two of the four parameters considered to be critical.
In practice, the 4 parameters of the reference curve specific to the reagent cartridge lot are loaded in the user’s
analyser via a CD provided with the kit. Calibration of the test must then be requested prior to use. The
calibration is performed and then verified by assaying one or more controls. Subsequent calibrations must be
repeated regularly in accordance with each assay’s instructions for use or as prompted by the analyser.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-5 13

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-5- Operating principles (continued)

1-5-4- Biochemistry assays

Samples and reagents are aspirated in accordance with the validated parameters for each assay and are
transferred into a cuvette where the changes in absorbancy (or optical density) will be monitored in the course
of the reaction taking place.
Depending on the type of assay defined in the analytical configuration for each set-up, the following
absorbancy measurements are used in the calculations:
• Terminal Point Uses the last absorbancy.
• Delta Terminal Point Calculation of the difference between the first and the last absorbances.
• Kinetic Calculation of the slope by linear regression over the absorbancies measured
Calculation of enzymatic activities using the formula:
VT x ∆ DO/mn x 1000
Activity =
VE x l x ε

Where:
• VT = Total volume.
• VE = Sample volume.
• l = Optical pathway (1 cm).
• ε = Molar extinction coefficient of analyte (in L.mol -1.cm -1).

Comment: In the set-up, the factor entered is equal to ε x 100

The results are calculated either in relation to a calibration, or multiplied by a factor.

The function used for the calibration is fixed in the analytical configuration. The functions available are:
• Linear regression.
• Linear interpolation.
• Polynomial function degree 2.
• Polynomial function degree 3.
• Polynomial function degree 4.
• Cubic Spline.

The calibrations and controls can be programmed on demand or automatically managed in terms of frequency
by the analyser.
A request for calibration is automatically accompanied by a request to perform QC control.
Requests for calibrations and controls can be made at any time. If the analyser is in the process of carrying
out the assay, the calibrations and controls take place prior to the analyses requested on the samples.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-5 14

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-6- Precautions for Use

1-6- Precautions for Use

The is a multiparameter selective analyser for in vitro assays in clinical biology.

The analyser is intended for professional use and must only be used by trained personnel in compliance with
the following safety precautions and good laboratory practice (GLP).

1-6-1- General precautions

• When installing Immunoassay cartridges into the reagent compartment, each reagent rack must be properly
inserted as shown on the sticker displayed on the reagent compartment cover (see 3-2- Installation of
reagents, page 38). Incorrect positioning of the rack onto its rail may cause either an insufficient mixing of
magnetic particles in their vial or incorrect pipetting of reagents.
• After start up or installation of a new reagent, a waiting period is necessary before using the reagent in an
assay. For Immunoassay cartridges this should be 40 minutes for temperature equilibration and magnetic
particle re-suspension (for biochemistry this should be 20 minutes to allow temperature equilibration). The
waiting period is automatically managed by the system through a count-down displayed on each reagent
position. Interrupting a count-down may impair the quality of analytical results.
• When the lid of the analyser is not equipped with a locking system, do not lift the lid while the analyser is
running (i.e. during the run cycle). Opening the lid during the run cycle interrupts the movements of the
pipetting arm. Should this occur, analyses under way may be interrupted and restarted (recycled).
• An activation key is provided with the accessories for analysers equipped with a locking system. The use of
the activation key is strictly restricted to the adjustment of probe position described in Section 5, 5-4-10-2-
Adjustment procedure for analyser with lid locking system, page 136.
• Do not place bottles of reagent on the surface of the analyser.
• While the analyser is in operation, do not touch the analyser stop/start button, do not remove the solid
waste. The solid waste tray must be present to enable the analyser to function.
• The solid waste can contain 400 cuvettes. The waste can be emptied during operation. It is recommended to
empty the solid waste before starting the run cycle
• Make sure that the reagent and sample racks are clean at all times.
• During sample programming (either from the interface software or via the centralised computer system),
verify that the appropriate sample type is selected. The type «Serum/Plasma» must be selected for each
blood sample, whether collected in a dry tube (serum) or collected in a tube containing anticoagulants
(plasma). The type «Urine» must be used only when defined in the assay setup (refer to the reagent IFU). The
type «Other» must be used when specified in the reagent IFU.
• The validity of results obtained depends on the correct programming of the sample type.
• Verify that the barcode reader can recognize the barcode symbology used for sample tubes (see Appendix
A-5, page A7). The character «%» is not recognized and must not be used. It is recommended to use a
symbology containing a check character.
• When installing a sample tube, check that the barcode number corresponds to the sample identification.
• Do not expose the eyes to the beam of barcode readers.
• The database is automatically backed up once a week when opening the application. Operators should store
back-ups from the computer onto CD or USB flash drive.
• To ensure confidentiality of results, patient demographic information (name, birth date, ...) are encrypted in
the database. An encryption key is generated in the first installation of the software. A copy is kept on the
Windows desktop. Keep a backup of the encryption key, outside the computer.
• Keep documentation of the set-up programmed on the analyser.
• Only Immunoassay and ancillary reagents supplied by IDS and its partners, can be used on the analyser
(catalogue available on request).
• To ensure that the cuvette loader functions correctly, only use full cubes of cuvettes. Never install isolated
layers in the loader.
• In the event of maintenance or an intervention by IDS Service & Support Personnel, the analyser and its
various components must first be cleaned and decontaminated as defined in the Maintenance section (see
Section 5).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-6 15

Software version V 14
 Operating principle
1-6- Precautions for Use (continued)

• Maintenance operations must be carried out at the frequency stipulated for each type of maintenance
activity. As some parts of the analyser are in contact with the biological samples, they must be considered to
pose a potential risk of infection.
• Validation of biochemistry reagents is the responsibility of the user and IDS takes no responsibility for the
validity of results.
• In order to guarantee the thermo-regulation of the carousel, ambient temperature must be lower than 30°C.
If necessary, provide air conditioning for the site.

1-6-2- Special precautions

The precautions for use specific to certain handling procedures described throughout the user manual are
indicated in the following format:
• Important notice

!
• Precaution which MUST be respected

1-6-3- Safety precautions

The safety precautions specific to certain handling procedures are described throughout the user manual in the
relevant paragraph and are associated with a symbol specific to the potential risk, in the following format :

WARNING:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Operating principle 1-6 16

Software version V 14
SECTION!2:
User!Interface!Software
 Section 2

User Interface Software 17

2-1- Structure of the Software 18

2-2- Main Screen 19
2-3- Menus 25
2-3-1- FILE Menu 25
2-3-2- SESSIONS menu 26
2-3-3- DATA menu 27
2-3-4- MAINTENANCE menu 28
2-3-4- MAINTENANCE menu (continued) 29
2-3-5- SETUP menu 30
2-3-6- MANAGEMENT OF LOTS menu 31
2-3-7- HELP menu 32
2-4- Functions keys 33

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 17

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-1- Structure of the Software

2-1- Structure of the Software

The software provides access to the options and information required to run the analyser.
Various options are available via pull-down menus at the top of the screen.
Access to the software requires a password. Multiple authorisation levels are managed by the system:
• Operator and Supervisor levels are for laboratory users while all other levels are reserved for IDS Service
and Support personnel. Access to items in the menu is dependent on user level.

Passwords and authorisation levels can be modified later if required.

The user interface application software is run on an external PC using Microsoft Windows™ (XP or Vista). The
PC is linked to the analyser via an Ethernet cable.
The analyser uses embedded software which interprets instructions from the user interface application
software into actions to be performed by the analyser. It also records the data obtained. This data is then sent
to the user interface application software for final result calculation and storage.
In the event of any interruption in the connection with the user interface, this software configuration allows the
analyser to continue to carry out its workload and store the raw data produced. When the connection is
restored, synchronisation will occur automatically without any data loss or interruption to the analytical
process.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-1 18

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-2- Main Screen

2-2- Main Screen

When the application is opened and a valid access code entered, the main screen is displayed.
Menu Bar Information buttons

Reagent Function Unlock lid

Status bar Sample Compartment2
Compartment buttons button1

1 Only for analyser equipped with a lid locking system

2Configurations of Removable trays Fixed tray

Sample compartment

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-2 19

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-2- Main Screen (continued)

Menu bar
Provides access to the different pull-down menus.

The illustration shows the reagent compartment

with reagents on board
The racks are automatically identified by the
integrated barcode reader when the rack is
inserted in the rail.
For each occupied position the following
information is displayed:
• Test name.
• Lot number.
• On-board expiry date.
• Number of tests remaining.
• Status of the reagent indicated by a colour
code (see Section 3, page 43).
• Status of the current calibration (see Section
3, page 44).
Detailed information for each analyte may be
accessed by clicking on the cartridge, in the
case of Immunology, or individual Biochemistry
reagents.
Information includes:
• Test name.
• Reagent type.
• Lot number.
• Container number.
• Type of container.
• Lot expiry date.
• Master curve number.
• In-use stability.
• On-board stability.
• Cumulative time on-board.
• On-board expiry date.
• For Immunology cartridges, the number of
remaining tests available after completion of
the programmed workload.
• For Biochemistry reagents, the available
volume and number of tests remaining.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-2 20

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-2- Main Screen (continued)

Information Application Buttons

Provides access to information regarding the analyser status

including :
• General status of the apparatus (initialised, standing etc.).
• Status of the various modules.
• Allowed/forbidden assays depending on the field.
• Temperatures : reagent compartment, carousel, ambient.
• Status of reagents.
• Status of reagent drawer, samples drawer, lid.

The general status is indicated by a colour code:

• Green = Operational.
• Orange = Caution: one of the elements is outside the optimal
operating conditions
(for example, temperature).
• Red = Error/fault.
• Yellow = Analyser not initialised (standing).

Provides information covering the workload requested including:

• Missing reagents required to perform queued assays.
• Expired reagents.
• Unavailable tests.
• Tests stopped during the cycle due to calibration failures,
Westgard rules violation etc.
• Automatic requests for calibrations and controls generated by the
system.
If messages affecting the current workload appear, the button is
displayed in orange with the number of warning messages
indicated.

If automatic requests have been generated, a flashing icon

will appear.

Provides access to the alarms generated by the system:

• Module errors.
• Lack of reagents.
An error message is indicated in the ALARM button which is
displayed in red and contains the number of errors identified.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-2 21

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-2- Main Screen (continued)

Function application buttons

Starts the run cycle.

Accesses calibration and quality control requests.

Displays the current calibration for each on-board lot of reagent.

Provides access to the work list and generated results. Contains

profiles sent by the Laboratory Information System (LIS).
The work list contains the details of the profiles completed or in
progress.
When the completed profile has been stored, the results are displayed
in the work list until the associated sample is removed. The results are
automatically stored provided the tests complete without any errors/
faults.

Allows manual entry of a barcode identifier for samples or reagents in

the event of a misreading by the integrated barcode readers.

Allows access to information regarding the ancillary reagents

connected to the system, and the status of the solid and liquid
waste.
The level of each element is displayed. The following detailed
information can be displayed by clicking on the reagent button:
• Identifier and name of the reagent.
• Lot number.
• Number of the container in the lot.
• Type of container.
• Lot expiry date.
• In-use stability*.
• Cumulative time on-board*.
• On-board expiry date*.
• Status of the reagent.
• Available volume (or number of cuvettes).
This menu allows the user to manually enter a barcode identifier in
the event of misreading by the integrated barcode reader.
Clicking on the liquid or solid wastes allows the user to confirm
emptying.
* not managed for cuvettes

Unlock lid button

(only for analyser equipped with a lid locking system)
This button is displayed only when the analyser is equipped with a lid
locking system.
In this case, the lid is continuously locked. As the lid must be opened
for maintenance tasks or interventions, access to the lid is authorised
when the analyser is not in cycle mode.
The button, when displayed, allows the user to unlock the lid before
opening.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-2 22

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-2- Main Screen (continued)

Sample compartment
The illustration of the sample compartment depends on the analyser configuration. For the two
configurations (fixed sample tray or removable trays), the occupied positions are shown.
Each position can be occupied by:
• Calibrators.
• Controls.
• Samples.
• Stat.
An icon identifies the type of sample installed in a position (see Section 3, page 67).
For each occupied position the following options are available:
• Entry of the identifier and the type of product installed (without a barcode).
• Programming of the sample analyses to be carried out.
• Results display for controls or samples.

A colour coded analysis status is associated with the center of the position (see Section 3, page 80).
A colour code is associated to the contour of the positions, to inform whether the system is using the installed
product (see Section 3, page 68). During a run cycle:
• a blue contour colour indicates that the installed product is scheduled in the workload and can still be
removed; remove this product and the planned workload will be modified.
• a green contour colour indicates that all the tests programmed for the sample are completed. It is
possible to configure the software in LOCAL SYSTEM SETTINGS menu to change the contour colour at
the end of sampling rather than completion of assays. The same colour code is applied on each tray for
the removable-tray configuration.

Removable trays

The illustration to the left shows the sample

compartment with the on-board trays
The tray and its samples are identified by the integrated
barcode reader when loading the tray in the
compartment.
Each tray is numbered.
For each tray, the free and occupied positions are
displayed. Each position can be occupied by :
• calibrators,
• controls,
• samples
The positions occupied but not identified by barcode
reading are programmed after loading the tray in the
sample compartment.
Any position of a 20 position-tray may be used to load a
calibrator, a sample or a stat sample.
A colour code is associated with the removable-tray
configuration (see Section 3, page 67).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-2 23

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-2- Main Screen (continued)

Fixed tray

The illustration above shows the samples tray with the

positions occupied by:
• Calibrators.
• Controls.
• Samples.
Each position is equipped with a detection sensor.
The samples are identified by the barcode reader (on the
front face) prior to loading the sample.
Alternatively, barcode identifiers can be entered manually
after sample loading:
Any position of the sample compartment may be used to
load a calibrator, a control, a sample or a stat sample.

Status bar

Displays information regarding:

• the analyser status,
• the work list status,
• the connection activity of the analyser (COM flashes blue in normal activity; COM fixed when there is a
break in communication),
• the connection activity with the centralised computer system (LIS flashes blue in normal activity; LIS fixed
when there is a break in communication).

Status of the analyser.

Number of profiles without associated positions. These profiles will

never be performed. The profiles will be started only when a position
is assigned.

Number of completed profiles in the work list.

Number of incomplete profiles in the work list with at least one assay
programmed but not completed.

Number of automatic requests generated by the system. The list can

be accessed via the WARNING window.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-2 24

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-3- Menus

2-3- Menus
Other functions are accessed by using the pull-down menus on the interface.

2-3-1- FILE Menu

Allows the user to save the database, in addition to the automatic

save performed each week. The saved database contains:
• Analytical configuration.
• Personal library.
• Calibrations and the quality controls.
• Reagent and ancillaries traceability.
• Stored results.
The database is saved under the format used in the application.

Allows the user to restore all or part of the saved database, as

desired, including:
• Analytical configuration.
• Personal library.
• Calibrations and the quality controls.
• Stored results.

Allows the user to update the analytical configuration from the CD-
ROM Master Database provided by Immunodiagnostic Systems.
Allows the user to exit the software.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-3 25

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-3- Menus (continued)

2-3-2- SESSIONS menu

Allows the user to start up the analyser. All modules will be initialised
and automatically primed. The reading modules are automatically
controlled.
Once start-up is complete, the option becomes inactive (grey).

Allows the user to put the analyser into standby mode.

Access to the work list: (see page 22).

Allows the user to start the run cycle: (see page 22).
Once the analyser is in assay mode, the option becomes inactive.
This option is active when the analyser is in run cycle.
Allows the user to stop the assay process.
This option is active when the analyser is in run cycle.
Displays information concerning the tests in process. The software
displays the time of processing and when each assay’s results will be
available.
Allows the user to view the available volumes and the number of
tests for each on-board reagent, before or during the run cycle.
Programming and processing of tests for the reagent Cartridge
Check System (CCS).
Simplifies programming of the work list by applying the same profile
to each occupied position.
Active only when removable-tray configuration (use in fail mode)
Simplifies programming of the work list by applying the same profile
to each occupied position of a removable sample tray.
Management of user access: when an access code is entered, a
specific session is opened. The user’s identifier and the level of
authorisation are displayed at the top of the title bar. Access codes
and identifiers are programmed in the SETTINGS menu.
Keep a record of your access codes. If lost, Operator sessions can be
opened by using the code HELP.
Each access will be recorded.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-3 26

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-3- Menus (continued)

2-3-3- DATA menu

Allows access to all the calibrations currently valid for each test in the
personal library. Displays the active calibration of a reagent lot for
each test of the personal library

Allows access to the stored results. When opened, the results are
displayed. Various filters can be applied to display results for a single
date, between two dates or for the entire storage period.

Analysis of quality controls results.

• LEVEY-JENNINGS: cumulative analysis of the results obtained by
test or by a control lot for a programmable period of time.
• WESTGARD: inspection of the control results with selected rules.
• History by product: record of the results obtained for each reagent
and for all tests using this reagent.
• Printouts: global printouts of Levey-Jennings data.

Records events for:

• System.
• Database.
• Access.
• Analytical.
• Laboratory Information System (LIS) transfers.
• Maintenance.
• Positive identification.

For use in fail mode: failure to detect samples and reagents.

Allows user to memorise configurations of the reagent compartment,
with the positions of each reagent recorded.

Reserved for IDS Service and Support Personnel.

Displays the number of assays (calibrations, controls, samples)

performed for each test.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-3 27

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-3- Menus (continued)

2-3-4- MAINTENANCE menu

Allows selective initialisation of modules.

Allows selective priming of modules.

Allows self-checking of measurement modules.

User maintenances:
• XYZ adjustment: adjustment of the probe reference position.
• Daily maintenance: table of daily maintenance.
• Weekly maintenance: table of weekly maintenance.
• Monthly maintenance: table of monthly maintenance.
• Maintenance history: allows user to display and print the
maintenance carried out.
• Trace machine: used at the request of IDS Technical Services &
Support; allows the exporting of data from the device for Service
diagnostics.

Reserved for IDS Service and Support Personnel.

Allows the user to carry out on demand one of the maintenance

activities automatically managed by the system.
• Washer needle cleaning: washer needles are cleaned by aspirating
IDS-iSYS D-SORB solution. The relevant volume is pipetted by the
sampling needle and distributed into four cuvettes. The cuvettes
are transferred to the washer module. After washing, these
cuvettes are eliminated into the solid waste. This automatic
maintenance takes place when the system is placed in standby
mode.
• Cleaning sample needle: certain categories of assays (infectious
diseases, auto-immunity) require an additional cleaning of the
sampling needle. This automatic maintenance activity is displayed
when the personal library contains a such assay. The cleaning
solution (Immunocleaner) is placed into the reagent compartment.
0.9 mL of solution are sampled by the needle, followed by a full
rinsing of the needle using D-Sorb solution. This automatic
maintenance takes place when the system is placed in standby
mode.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-3 28

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-3- Menus (continued)

2-3-4- MAINTENANCE menu (continued)

Used only at the request of IDS Technical Services & Support:
allows the user to deactivate a washer module or a specific
wavelength in case of failure.
Displays the analyser status (see Section 2-2, page 21).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-3 29

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-3- Menus (continued)

2-3-5- SETUP menu

Contains a list of all the tests developed for the analyser.

Selecting one from the list displays the set-up of the test: steps of
the assay, calibrators and controls, handling volumes, incubation
time, etc.
Some elements can be modified by the Supervisor (such as units or
controls), others can only be viewed.

Contains a list of tests that can be run on the analyser.

Allows the user to program reflex tests. Depending upon defined

conditions, the result of an analyte obtained for a sample can trigger
additional assays on the same sample (see page 156).

Allows access to the list of all products and suppliers stored in the
system.

Allows the user to create an unlimited number of profiles which can

be used for programming.

For removable-tray configuration:

Allows the operator to define for each removable rack:
• the type of rack:
- M (mixed): for samples, calibrators and controls
- 1.25D ME: dedicated for 1,25 D immunopurified samples
(manual extraction)
• the default sample container for the rack: tube, cup, ….
• the start option : automatic or on demand start.
Allows the operator to personalise the system:
• Local System: selection of printing options, automatic validation
of results, automatic transfers to the LIS; activation of sound
alarms; programming of automatic start-up and shut-down.
• Languages: selection of user language.
• Operators: programming of access level and user authorisation
(name and access code).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-3 30

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-3- Menus (continued)

2-3-6- MANAGEMENT OF LOTS menu

Displays reagents used on the system:

• Personal library: data storage for different reagent lots for the tests
in the personal library. For each cartridge the identifier, the lot
number, the lot expiry date, the in-use and on-board stabilities,
the records of loading/unloading operations, the dates of first and
last uses and the remaining number of tests can be displayed.
• Preventive alert thresholds: allows programming of the minimum
available number of tests for each assay. When this level is
reached, a preventive alarm is generated.
• History: traceability of calibrations, controls and results obtained
with each reagent cartridge.
• On-board volumes: displays volumes and number of tests for all
on-board reagents and ancillaries.

Lists calibrators used on the system.

Allows users to manually input the values for each lot of calibrator.
Allows activation of the calibrator lots used for a specific assay.

Lists controls used on the system.

Allows users to enter manually the values of each lot of control.
Allows activation of the control lots used for a specific assay.

Displays data for ancillaries used with the system.

• Personal library: information regarding the different lots of
ancillaries used with the system.
Allows display of the identifier, the lot number and its expiry date,
the in-use stability (cuvettes excepted), the dates of first and last
use and the remaining quantity (volume or number of cuvettes) for
each individual product.
• History: traceability of calibrations, controls and results obtained
with each ancillary.
• Stability: displays the in-use stability value for the relevant
ancillaries.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-3 31

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-3- Menus (continued)

2-3-7- HELP menu

Displays information concerning software (for example, specific

version).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-3 32

Software version V 14
 User Interface Software
2-4- Functions keys

2-4- Functions keys

The function keys can be used as a shortcut to access the following options from the main screen.

F2 Work list.

F3 Start the run cycle.

F4 Storage.

F5 Calibrations.

F6 Run cycle monitoring.

F8 Status of analyser.

F9 Stop run cycle.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 User Interface Software 2-4 33

Software version V 14
SECTION!3:
Use
 Section 3
Use 34
Information on the lid opening 35
3-1- Start up 37
3-1-1- Initial Start up 37
3-1-2- Start up from standby mode 37
3-2- Installation of Reagents 38
3-2-1- Colour codes associated with reagent positions in the reagent compartment 43
3-2-2- Information displayed with reagents 43
3-2-3- Management of on board reagents 44
3-3- Installation of Ancillary Reagents 46
3-3-1- Installation of internal ancillary reagents 47
3-3-2- Installation of external ancillary reagents 48
3-3-3- Installation of IDS-iSYS cuvettes 50
3-4- System Performance Checks (Immunoassay only) 52
3-4-1- Programming the qualification profile 52
3-4-2- Management of results 53
3-5- Programming Calibrations and Controls 55
3-5-1- Programming calibrations 55
3-5-2- Programming Quality Controls 58
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment 60
3-6-1- Removable trays 61
3-6-2- Fixed tray 64
3-6-3- Configure a position without barcode 65
3-6-4- End of loading 66
3-6-5- Colour codes associated with sample positions 67
3-6-6- Colour codes associated with removable trays 67
3-6-7- Colour codes associated with position contour 68
3-7- Programming Samples 69
3-8- Assays 70
3-8-1- Performing assays 70
3-8-2- Adding samples during an assay 71
3-8-3- Adding or replacing a reagent during an assay 72
3-8-4- Releasing an alarm during an assay 73
3-8-5- Unloading samples during an assay 75
3-8-6- Performing reflex tests 76
3-8-7- Performing dilutions 77
3-9- Adding an Emergency (STAT) Sample 79
3-10- Results 80
3-10-1- Result of a calibration 81
3-10-2- Result of controls 85
3-10-3- Sample results 86
3-10-4- Work list results 87
3-11- Messages Associated with Results 89
3-12- Results Storage 93
3-13- Quality Control Management 95
3-13-1- Cumulative analysis 95
3-13-2- Westgard rules 98
3-14- Switching The Analyser Off 100
3-14-1- Emptying the solid waste 101
3-14-2- Emptying the liquid waste 102
3-15- Switching The Analyser Off Completely 103

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 34

Software version V 14
 Use
Information on the lid opening

Information on the lid opening

The purpose of the analyser lid is to protect the user when the pipetting arm moves.
Opening the lid during use stops any movement of the pipetting arm in order to guarantee the user’s safety
during operation.
All analysers are equipped with sensors to detect the opening or closing of the lid.
To increase the level of security, the latest analysers are now equipped with an electro-magnetic lid locking
system, managed by software.
The locker is located under the lid, at the rear, right side. The lid is continuously locked, even when the
analyser is off. The lid can be opened only after sending the unlock command from the user interface.
Access to the lid’s opening is controlled and authorised only when the analyser is not in cycle mode. In this
case, the unlock lid button is displayed on the main screen.
Certain operations described from this section require the lid to be opened e.g. installation of TRIGGER A and
TRIGGER B, maintenances, etc. Depending on the presence or absence of the locking system, the procedure
for the lid’s opening is different.
The lid must always be fully opened and the lid support tool provided with the analyser must always be
installed in order to ensure the user’s safety.
When the lid support tool is fully inserted onto the piston rod, the lid can not accidentally fall down.

Analysers without locking system

The lid can be opened directly. The sensors on the analyser will detect that he lid has been opened and
prevent any movement of the pipetting. The only exception to this is during the adjustment procedure for the
reference position of the sampling needle.
When the lid is opened, the pipetting arm is powered but remains in its last position and any movement is
stopped. An accidental opening during the run cycle interrupts sampling and may result in recycling.

Analysers fitted with locking system

The lid can only be opened if unlocked. Lid unlocking is requested by using a function button on the main
screen, displayed only if the analyser is not in cycle mode. Before final unlocking, the pipetting arm moves to
its home position, located at the left side of the reagent compartment, with the sampling system on its bracket.
The pipetting arm is then turned off and the lid can be opened to perform the required operations. The lid is
locked as soon as closed. The pipetting arm will remain in home position until the next use (run cycle,
priming,..).
• From the main screen, click on .
The command for unlocking is sent to the analyser
• The message displays:

The sampling arm moves to its home position.

• When the lid is unlocked, the message and the unlock button are no longer displayed.
• The lid can then be opened.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Information on the lid opening 35

Software version V 14
 Use
Information on the lid opening (continued)

Opening the lid

• When access is authorised, open the lid up to its maximal position.

• Insert the lid support tool onto the piston rod until the clips is fully inserted.

Closing the lid

• Hold the lid in upper position using its handle.
• Remove the lid support tool.
• Gently lower the lid until closing.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Information on the lid opening 36

Software version V 14
 Use
3-1- Start up

3-1- Start up
3-1-1- Initial Start up
• Switch the analyser on by pressing the switch located on the left-hand side to position “1”.
• Switch the computer on, then open the software by double-clicking on the IDS-iSYS icon.
• Once the software is open, enter your access code to open a session.
• Start the analyser by selecting Start up from the session menu:

All modules are initialised and the ancillary reagents are automatically primed.

! If a new version of the software is detected on the analyser after opening, a message about
downloading this new version to the analyser will appear.

3-1-2- Start up from standby mode

• Enter your access code to open a session.
The analyser can be programmed to start up automatically at a selected ‘wake-up’ time.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-1 37

Software version V 14
 Use
3-2- Installation of Reagents

3-2- Installation of Reagents

Take care when opening and closing the reagent compartment: rough handling when opening
! and closing the drawer may cause the internal reagents to spill.

Access authorised (Drawer unlocked).

Sampling in progress. Access denied (Drawer locked).

(Flashing between red and green) Sampling in less than 2 minutes.

During the run cycle, if a reagent is to be aspirated within 2 minutes, the drawer light flashes
red and green.

! When opening the reagent compartment during the run cycle, assays which are under way may
be stopped if a reagent was scheduled to be added when the compartment was open. In the
event of this, the rescheduled assays are automatically added to the end of the work list.

Access to the reagent compartment is controlled. The light located on the front face of the drawer indicates
whether access is authorised (green indicator) or if the drawer is locked (red indicator).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-2 38

Software version V 14
 Use
3-2- Installation of Reagents (continued)

The reagent racks are loaded in the refrigerated compartment.

The reagent cartridges are placed on racks specific to each field.
An Immunoassay reagent rack is designed to hold a cartridge containing all the reagents needed for the test.

For cartridge handling, refer to the reagent instructions for use (IFU).

! Magnetic particles in certain Immunoassay cartridges require a particular mixing step before
loading the cartridge into the rack. Follow the instructions for mixing described in the reagent
instructions for use.

Biochemistry reagents are supplied in the form of individual reagent bottles.

Biochemistry reagent racks are designed to contain either 6 x 20 mL bottles or 3 x 50 mL bottles.

Rack 6 x 20 ml Rack 3 x 50 ml

If the reagents have been stored on-board and the analyser has been put into standby mode, the identification
of these reagents will be restored upon start up.
Reagent cartridges can also be installed during the run cycle.
The magnetic particle vial of Immunoassay cartridges is continuously stirred when in the reagent compartment.
The pictogram below appears on the reagent cover, and describes the precautions to be taken when loading a
reagent rack:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-2 39

Software version V 14
 Use
3-2- Installation of Reagents (continued)

Installation of reagents in the refrigerated compartment

• If access is authorised, open the reagent compartment.
• Slide the reagent rack into a rail in the refrigerated reagent compartment until the positioning pin is fully
inserted.
• Push down the rack handle to ensure the reagent rack is firmly positioned at the bottom of the compartment.
The reagent rack should be firmly locked and should not move during the stirring of magnetic particle vial.
• Visually check the magnetic particle vial of Immunoassay cartridges is stirring in a smooth motion.
• Repeat for all the racks to be installed on the analyser.

The reagent cartridges are automatically identified by the barcode reader as the rack is inserted in the rail.
On the interface, the reagents are identified and displayed in green with the corresponding lot number.
The countdown sequence until use begins automatically.

Each time a cartridge (or a reagent bottle) already stabilized on-board is removed then

! installed again in the compartment, a countdown before use begins, even for an immediate
reloading.
Handle the reagent racks only when necessary.

! If positive identification has failed, the reagent cartridge position is displayed in orange with
“???” instead of the name and lot number.

It is imperative, when installing a cartridge or a reagent bottle, that each occupied position of

! the reagent compartment should be immediately identified.

Otherwise, the management of reagents provided by the system (see 3-2-3 Management of
on board reagents, page 44) may be impaired and the results generated may be incorrect.

• Should identification fail, repeat the procedure for putting the reagent rack in position.
• If the position is still not identified, click on the position.
• Select the type of reagent rack installed.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-2 40

Software version V 14
 Use
3-2- Installation of Reagents (continued)

• To select an Immunoassay rack, click on “Cartridge” and use the keyboard to manually enter the barcode
identifier for the cartridge.

The information relating to the Immunoassay reagent cartridge (composition, reagent lots, expiry date,
master curve) is automatically associated with the barcode reading and the position is displayed in green.
This information is also contained in the CD supplied with the kits.
• If this information is not available, the position of the reagent is displayed in white with red stripes.
• In this case, install the CD supplied with the kit and use the keyboard to re-enter the barcode identifier.
• To select another type of rack, click on “Rack”.
• Then select the type of rack installed:
- 3 x 50 mL, for Biochemistry reagents.
- 6 x 20 mL, for Biochemistry reagents.

3 x 50 ml rack

6 x 20 ml rack

• Then click on the position and use the keyboard to enter the barcode identifier for the bottle, and select the
reagent installed.
• The information about the bottle (type of reagent, lot, expiry date) is automatically associated with the
barcode reading. This information is also contained in the CD supplied with the reagents. If the information is
not available, the position of the reagent is displayed in white with red stripes.
• In this case, install the CD supplied with the kit.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-2 41

Software version V 14
 Use
3-2- Installation of Reagents (continued)

Management of waiting period before reagent use

As soon as a reagent loaded in the reagent compartment is identified by the system, the countdown until use
begins.
The remaining time before use, expressed in minutes and second, is displayed inside the cartridge icon
.
This delay before use allows the reagent temperature to stabilize to the compartment temperature, and the
magnetic particles to be sufficiently stirred in Immunoassay cartridges.
This time is managed specifically per analyte and individually for each on-board reagent.
A cartridge can be removed during this waiting period. If the time removing is under 5 minutes, the current
countdown continues.
If a cartridge is removed with more than 5 minutes left, the countdown is stopped and a new countdown
begins.

A countdown may be stopped in certain clearly identified cases (e.g., quick unloading of a reagent previously
on board):

• Click on the relevant cartridge or reagent.

• In the detailed information window, click on :

• To stop the countdown, click on .

The cartridge will be used for running assays as soon as the countdown has been stopped.
• To continue the current countdown, click on .
Reagent will be used in assays when the countdown ends.

The reagents must be stabilised at the temperature of the refrigerated compartment before
use. Magnetic particles in Immunoassay cartridges must be sufficiently stirred.

! Wait for 40 minutes after installing reagent cartridges before starting assays (20 min for
Biochemistry).
Any interruption of countdown before use may impair the analytical quality of results.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-2 42

Software version V 14
 Use
3-2- Installation of Reagents (continued)

3-2-1- Colour codes associated with reagent positions in the reagent compartment

Rail free.

Reagent correct.

??? Presence of a rack or reagent detected but not identified.

Preventive alarm threshold reached.

Reagent volume inadequate or deadline for using over.

Information associated with the reagent not available.

Reagent detected higher than the maximum filling level.

3-2-2- Information displayed with reagents

The main information regarding on-board reagents is directly displayed via its graphic representation.
Detailed information is displayed by clicking on the relevant reagent.

Immunoassay cartridges

Deadline for using the cartridge on the system. Date is replaced by expiry time
when the day of expiry date begins.

Countdown before use (after reagent loading).

Test name and lot number.

Number of remaining tests.

Number of available dilutions (only for tests using a diluent).

A calibration will be requested in the next 24 hours for tests using a calibration
frequency managed by the system.

The calibration was recalculated after excluding at least one calibrator replicate

Status of the current calibration for the reagent lot (see page 44).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-2 43

Software version V 14
 Use
3-2- Installation of Reagents (continued)

Calibration status

The icon on the cartridge shows the status of the current calibration.

Not calibrated

Valid Calibration

Calibration accepted by the user

Expired or not valid Calibration

Biochemistry reagents

The following information is displayed for Biochemistry reagents:

• test name,
• lot number.

3-2-3- Management of on board reagents

Reagents are managed by the system in terms of:
• available on board quantity (number of tests for Immunoassay cartridges and volume for BIochemistry
reagents),
• expiry date,
• in-use stability,
• on board stability.
The expiry date is managed for the reagent lot. Other data are individually managed per cartridge or per bottle
of the lot.
When loading a new cartridge or a new reagent bottle the system records the date and time of installation.
All operations of loading / unloading are recorded for each cartridge or each reagent bottle.
Cumulative on board time is calculated from these data (displayed in the format: Days \ Hours : Minutes :
Seconds)
All this information can be displayed by clicking on the position occupied by the reagent and is stored in the
menu MANAGEMENT OF LOTS / REAGENTS.
The two following stabilities, included in the lot data, are applied to each cartridge or reagent bottle:
• in-use stability: period of time during which a cartridge or a reagent bottle can be used after opening and
storage in conditions defined in reagent IFU. In-use stability is defined by the system from the date and time
of first installation of the cartridge or reagent bottle into the reagent compartment.
• on board stability: period of time during which a cartridge or a reagent bottle can be used after opening
when stored on-board. On-board stability is defined by the system from the date and time of first installation
of the cartridge or reagent bottle and takes into account the cumulative on board time of the cartridge or
reagent bottle.
According to the nature of the reagents, these stabilities are expressed in days or in hours.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-2 44

Software version V 14
 Use
3-2- Installation of Reagents (continued)

By using these stability data, the system manages the expiry of each individual cartridge or reagent bottle
installed in the refrigerated compartment. This expiry date is established with the two following dates:
• lot expiry date,

• on board expiry date, defined as the use-by date for using the cartridge or the reagent bottle.

The on board expiry date d’expiration is established by a dynamic calculation based on the following data:
• cumulative on board time,
• on board stability,

• in-use stability,

• lot expiry date.

The on board expiry date (in days and hours) is initially calculated from the first installation date of the reagent
and from the on board stability supplied with the lot data. The expiry time is set at 23:59 for all reagents.
Then this date is constantly updated taking into account the cumulative on board time. This date is finally
compared with the in-use expiry date and with the lot expiry date.
The cartridge or bottle can be used up to the date and time displayed as its on board expiry date.
The date is replaced by expiry time (23:59 ) when the day of expiry date begins.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-2 45

Software version V 14
 Use
3-3- Installation of Ancillary Reagents

3-3- Installation of Ancillary Reagents

The ancillary reagents comprise:
• IDS-iSYS Cuvettes.
• Internal ancillary reagents.
• External ancillary reagents.

Ancillary reagents are managed by the analyser:

• for available on-board quantities,

• for expiry date,

and, except for cuvettes:

• for in-use stability.

The expiry date is managed for each lot.

When identifying a new ancillary reagent is identified, the system records the date and time of installation.
All operations of loading / unloading are recorded. Cumulative on-board time is calculated from this data
(displayed in the format Number of: Days \ Hours : Minutes : Seconds).
The expiry date of each individual ancillary reagent is established from the first on board installation date and
from its in-use stability, except for cuvettes. The on board expiry date of each cuvette cube is the lot expiry
date. The expiry time is set at 23:59 for all ancillary reagents.
A message displayed in the WARNING window the last day of use for a consumable indicates that expiry will
occur later that day.
Detailed information can be displayed by clicking on the icon of each consumable and is recorded in the menu
MANAGEMENT OF LOTS / ANCILLARIES.

• Click on to display the level of ancillary reagents available.

For each solution the current volume is displayed.

The number of IDS-iSYS Cuvettes present in the loader is displayed.
• If an ancillary reagent is displayed as missing, either volume is inadequate or expiry date is exceeded (colour
code red), install a new ancillary reagent.

!
If the analyser is carrying out an assay, only the IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube and the IDS-iSYS
System Liquid can be replaced. The other ancillary reagents cannot be replaced until the
analyser has completed the cycle.

! Only use IDS products.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-3 46

Software version V 14
 Use
3-3- Installation of Ancillary Reagents (continued)

3-3-1- Installation of internal ancillary reagents

Description Field

IDS-iSYS Trigger A Immunoassay.

IDS-iSYS Trigger B Immunoassay.

WARNING:
OPENING/CLOSING THE LID
The lid must be opened for this operation.
Always handle the lid carefully during opening and closing.
The lid must always be fully open and the lid support tool must always be installed.
Take care not to knock the lid during any analyser intervention.
When the lid is not fully open there is a risk of it falling.
During closing, maintain the lid open when removing the lid support tool, to avoid any
risk of accidental falling.

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Remove the cap from the new ancillary reagent container.
• If necessary, take out the bung and remove the empty container.
• Scan the ancillary with the barcode reader.
The analyser will beep for the first time.
• Within 10 seconds, install the new bottle in its position identified by colour code.
• Install the supply line into the bottle.
The analyser will beep a second time.
• If the barcode is not read by the barcode reader, click on the ancillary reagent then use the keyboard to enter
the identifier.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• Once the new bottles are installed, a message proposing an automatic priming is displayed:

• Click on to confirm the priming of the product(s).

The analyser starts the priming sequence.
Comment: The automatic priming can be cancelled by clicking on . In this case, the priming will
take place automatically when starting a run cycle.

! Refer to the catalogue for the product references of the ancillary reagents to be ordered.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-3 47

Software version V 14
 Use
3-3- Installation of Ancillary Reagents (continued)

3-3-2- Installation of external ancillary reagents

Description Colour code Field

IDS-iSYS System Liquid

White. All.
(5 litres)

IDS-iSYS Wash (10 litres) Blue. Immunoassay.

IDS-iSYS D-Sorb (1 litre) Black. All.

AP Substrate Green Immunoassay*.

*Depending on the analyser configuration

Installation of IDS-iSYS System Liquid, Wash S and D-Sorb

• Remove the lid and level sensor from the container to be replaced.
• Remove the adhesive barcode label for SYST L and WASH container.
• Scan the new ancillary reagent barcode label with the reader located on the front of the machine.
The analyser will beep for the first time.
• Within 10 seconds, put the level sensor in position within the new ancillary reagent for the IDS-iSYS D-Sorb
and IDS-iSYS Wash solutions.
The analyser will beep a second time.
Replace the lid and the plunger of the IDS-iSYS System Liquid.
• Priming of the IDS-iSYS System Liquid takes place automatically.
• For other ancillaries, a message proposing an automatic priming is displayed:

• Click on to confirm the priming of the product(s).

The analyser starts the priming sequence.
Comment: The automatic priming can be cancelled by clicking on . In this case, the priming will
take place automatically when starting a run cycle.
• If the ancillary barcode is not read by the barcode reader, click on the ancillary reagent then use the
keyboard to enter the identifier.

! Refer to the catalogue for the product references of the ancillary reagents to be ordered.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-3 48

Software version V 14
 Use
3-3- Installation of Ancillary Reagents (continued)

Installation of AP Substrate
• Remove the cap from the new ancillary reagent bottle.
• If necessary, take out the bung and remove the empty bottle.
• Scan the ancillary with the barcode reader.
The analyser will beep for the first time.
• Within 10 seconds, install the new bottle in its position.
The analyser will beep a second time.
• Install the supply line into the bottle.
• If the barcode is not read by the barcode reader, click on the ancillary reagent then use the keyboard to enter
the identifier.
• Once a new bottle is installed, a message is displayed:

• Click on to confirm the priming of the AP substrate.

The analyser starts the AP Substrate priming sequence.
Comment: The automatic priming of the AP Substrate circuit can be cancelled by clicking on . In
this case, the priming will take place automatically when starting a run cycle.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-3 49

Software version V 14
 Use
3-3- Installation of Ancillary Reagents (continued)

3-3-3- Installation of IDS-iSYS cuvettes

WARNING:
RISK OF INJURY

Do not place your hand or fingers into the loader.

If necessary, remove the empty IDS-iSYS Cuvettes box.

• Scan the replacement box with the barcode reader.
• Within 10 seconds of the barcode reading, install the IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube into the loader with the
window to the front.

• Remove the protective plastic strip: pull forwards to break the seal. Gently pull upwards to remove the
protective strip. Place the protective strip over the cube to protect the window from dust.

• If the barcode is not read by the barcode reader, click on the ancillary reagent then use the keyboard to enter
the barcode identifier.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-3 50

Software version V 14
 Use
3-3- Installation of Ancillary Reagents (continued)

Follow the directions for positioning of the cube in the loader.

Do not remove the protective strip before installing the cube in the loader.
Install only full cubes. Never install individual plates.

! Reassembly of cuvette plates will cause the analyser to jam.

Correct positioning of the cube of cuvettes in the loader is essential for the automatic cuvette
loading module to function correctly.
The cuvettes are disposable devices.

! Refer to the catalogue for the product references of the ancillary reagents to be ordered.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-3 51

Software version V 14
 Use
3-4- System Performance Checks (Immunoassay only)

3-4- System Performance Checks (Immunoassay only)

The performance of the analyser must be checked on a daily basis before performing an assay requiring
calibration, controls or samples.
To achieve this, a reagent cartridge known as Cartridge Check System (CCS) is used. Different protocols
are applied to this cartridge in order to determine the functional state of the various analyser modules.
For daily use and acceptance criteria, refer to the CCS cartridge instructions for use (IFU).
The qualification profile can be programmed as part of the automatic start-up of the analyser (see Section 7,
7-1- Programming the automatic qualification profile, page 152).
3-4-1- Programming the qualification profile
• From the main screen, select:

The qualification profile menu is displayed.

• If results from a previous profile are present in the list of current results, click on .
The results are sent to storage and the list is released for a new profile.
• From the drop-down list, select the necessary test and programme the required number of replicates (see
CCS IFU) then click on .
• Repeat the operation for each test required.
• Click on .

• Start the profile by clicking on .

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-4 52

Software version V 14
 Use
3-4- System Performance Checks (continued)

3-4-2- Management of results

• From the QC profile settings menu, click on to store the current results.
• The CCS raw data are extracted in the STORAGE menu. From the main screen, select:

• In Results storage menu select the CCS results you wish to export, then click on .
• Validate the selection corresponding to the results you wish to export.
• Enter the file name [Date CCS] and save the txt file in the assigned folder.
This will save the raw CCS data in a text file (.txt).
• Minimize GUI software then open assigned CCS folder.
• Right click on desired .txt file. Choose "Open With".
• Select «OpenOffice Scalc».
• On the "Text Import" screen, click on "OK".
• In the OpenOffice Scalc worksheet, highlight line 1 to line 18 (results for CCS).

Many important data are not visible on the screen as some columns in the file are not used
and the ancillary lot numbers are hidden on the right side of the file (See sign in red).
! All data including those not visible on the screen should be copied and pasted into the “QC
outil client CCS” file
All complete lines should be highlighted to be copied.

• With arrow on highlighted area, right click mouse and choose "Copy" (or press CTR+C).
• Minimize OpenOffice Scalc worksheet.
• Open the “QC outil client CCS” (EXL-CQR-001V2) with OpenOffice ‘Scalc” from CD drive (CCS mini CD-
ROM).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-4 53

Software version V 14
 Use
3-4- System Performance Checks (continued)

• Click on “Ready Only” in the Password window.

• Select the “Raw data” sheet.

• Select the cell A2 then Right click on mouse with the arrow on the cell A2 and choose "Paste" (or press CTR
+V) to paste data into template.
• Verify that the data are paste in the correct order and all in triplicates.
• The data are automatically calculated and all necessary information is transmitted into the CCS result form.
• Validate the analyser performance using this data as directed by IDS Service and Support Personnel.

Do not perform immunoassays if the analyser performance level is not satisfactory (valid).
! Refer to Section 6 of this manual Troubleshooting (see Section 6, page 143).

• Complete the form with the laboratory name, the Operator name, the instrument S/N and GUI version. ( time
can be saved by saving this information in a template file in the assigned folder).
• Select File (from the toolbar) "Save As" (from the drop down menu) and rename the file using "date CCS» to
save in the assigned folder, then click on “Save”.
• Select "Keep current format.
• If a printed copy is required, print the CCS results.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-4 54

Software version V 14
 Use
3-5- Programming Calibrations and Controls

3-5- Programming Calibrations and Controls

The frequency of calibrations and controls can be programmed on demand or automatically managed in
frequency by the system.
ManagIng the frequency will automatically generate a demand if the relevant calibration and/or control is not
yet programmed in the menu Calibration/Control.
Each reagent lot has its own calibration and controls, thus allowing multiple reagent lots of the same analyte
on board at the same time.
A request for calibration is automatically accompanied by a request to include QCs in the assay (QC1 for
Biochemistry) or several QCs depending on the configuration.
Requests for controls can be made as soon as a validated calibration is stored.
Requests for calibrations and controls can be made at any time for the reagent lots on board. During the run
cycle the calibrations and the controls take priority over all other tests requested.

3-5-1- Programming calibrations

Accepting an automatic action
Automatic requests for calibration are generated only for the reagent lots on board, either when a new lot of a
Biochemistry reagent is detected, or when the calibration has expired (as defined in the assay set-up).
An automatic request must be confirmed in order to be performed.

The appearance of automatic actions are indicated with the icon flashing in the WARNING button.
• From the main screen, click on the WARNING button.
• All the automatic requests for calibration generated by the system are shown in the lower part of the window,
under the label «Automatic Action». The reagent lot is displayed along with the demand.
• A calibration request is accepted by clicking on .
Comment: an automatically generated request for calibration can be cancelled by clicking on . In this
case, a record is made in the event log. If the current calibration has expired, results will not be calculated.

Programming a calibration
• From the main screen, click on

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-5 55

Software version V 14
 Use
3-5- Programming Calibrations and Controls (continued)

The list of calibrations for each reagent lot is shown according to the selected display option:

Displays the last calibration for each on-board lot of reagent.

Displays all the calibrations performed in the last 60 days.

Displays the calibrations of all unexpired reagent lots for all

analytes of the private library.
Only the last calibration is diplayed for each lot of reagent.
Comment: The display option selected is kept after closing the window.

Programming a Calibration of a New Reagent Lot

! When calibrating a new Immunoassay reagent lot, the calibrators associated with this lot must
be placed into the sample rack before programming the request.

• Click on alongside the assay to be calibrated.

A message confirming the request displays:

• Click on .
A tick is displayed in the calibration column and in the appropriate QC column(s).

Comment: The request can be cancelled by clicking on .

If more than one reagent lot is on-board, when is clicked on a new window appears (see below).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-5 56

Software version V 14
 Use
3-5- Programming Calibrations and Controls (continued)

• Select the new lot to be calibrated, and then click on .

A message confirming the request displays:

• Click on .
A tick is displayed in the calibration column and in the appropriate QC column(s).
Comment: The request can be cancelled by clicking on .

Programming a New Calibration for a Reagent

• The resulting screen (see below) shows a list of all tests in the personal library. It also includes the date and
time of the last calibration for the on-board analytes.

• Click on the box in the column in front of the lot to be calibrated.

A message confirming the request displays:

• Click on .
A tick is displayed in the calibration column and in the appropriate QC column(s).
Comment: The request can be cancelled by clicking on .

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-5 57

Software version V 14
 Use
3-5- Programming Calibrations and Controls (continued)

! Calibrations for several lots of the same Biochemistry reagent can be programmed
simultaneously.

! The current calibration can be displayed for a reagent lot by double-clicking on the lot number
or on the display area (light green area).

3-5-2- Programming Quality Controls

Controls can be performed at any time for the on-board reagent lots provided there is a valid calibration.
An automatic frequency can also be defined for each control in the assay setup.
Control levels validating the calibration and defined in the assay setup with an automatic frequency (once or
twice per day) are run in the number of replicates required by the frequency (singlicate or duplicate) at the first
programming of the day. When 2 runs per day are required, the same rule is applied for the first control run of
the afternoon. In the case of an automatic request, controls are run in the number of replicates defined in the
assay setup.

Accepting an automatic action

Automatic requests for controls are generated for each level, and only for reagent lots on board.
An automatic request must be confirmed in order to be performed.

The appearance of automatic actions are indicated with the icon flashing in the WARNING button.
• From the main screen, click on the WARNING button.
All the automatic requests for controls generated by the system are shown in the lower part of the window,
under the label «Automatic Action». The reagent lot is displayed with the request.
• A control request is accepted by clicking on .
Comment: a request for control generated automatically can be cancelled by clicking on . In this case, a
record is made in the event log.

! Controls programmed by accepting automatic actions are always run in the number of
replicates defined in the assay setup.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-5 58

Software version V 14
 Use
3-5- Programming Calibrations and Controls (continued)

Programming Quality Controls for a Reagent Lot

Controls can be performed at any time for the on-board reagent lots provided there is a valid calibration.
The number of replicates can be defined for each control level at the programming step, except when set by
the system.
If an automatic action generated for a control level validating the calibration was cancelled or not yet accepted,
the number of replicates is set by the system. Control runs required by the frequency (1 or 2 assays per day)
must be assayed in the number of replicates defined in the assay setup. In this case, the system will not allow
any selection in the programming window (radio buttons in grey).
The number of replicates can be selected for each supplementary run.
In case of a control level not validating the calibration and managed in frequency, the number of replicates can
be selected for each run.
• From the main screen, click on .
• To request a QC1, QC2, QC3 or QC4 quality control, click on the box corresponding to the test and to the
reagent lot to be performed.

• Select the relevant number of replicates for the control when applicable.
When appropriate, the number of replicates programmed is shown in grey.
• Click on to confirm the control programming.
Comment : Control request can be cancelled by clicking on .
• Load the necessary calibrators and controls onto the analyser.

If the value of a calibrator or control is not defined for the active lot, a window automatically

! opens allowing values to be entered.

Entering values of calibrators and controls requires a Supervisor level of access (or above).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-5 59

Software version V 14
 Use
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment

3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment

Access authorised (Drawer unlocked).

Sampling under way. Access denied (Drawer locked).

Access to the sample compartment is controlled. if the light is green, access is available. When assays are
under way, the sample compartment is locked (red light).

When the sample compartment is opened during the run cycle, new tests will be delayed.
The reagents will continue to be aspirated for the tests which are already running.

! Once the compartment is closed, the analyser can resume the sample workload, including
the new tests.
Close the sample compartment as soon as the loading is finished in order to maintain the
performance of the analyser.

Any position of the sample compartment may be used to install samples, calibrators and controls. Each of
these have an associated icon shown in the table below:

Calibrator
Serum, Plasma
Sample
Control
Urine

Sample identifiers (barcodes or manual entries) must not contain the character «%». This

! character is not recognized by the system.

Avoid the use of identifiers solely containing 12 numbers, similar to the barcode structure of
calibrators and controls provided by IDS.

When using the 64 position sample tray, sample cups and paediatric tubes must be placed in
! the tube adapters provided with the system to guarantee the quality of sampling.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-6 60

Software version V 14
 Use
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment (continued)

3-6-1- Removable trays

When not on-board, removable trays should be placed on a flat solid surface, to avoid any risk
of spillage.

! During loading/unloading operations in the sample compartment, handle the removable trays
with care.
Rough handling may cause the samples to spill.

• Prepare the trays containing the samples to be assayed.

• Place the calibrators and controls in cups with an adapter on the tray.
• Place the tubes with the barcode label facing outward.
Each position may be used to load a calibrator, a control or a sample, placed in a tube or in a cup (with
adapter).
When all the products are installed, the tray can be loaded.
• If the light is green, open the sample compartment.
• Slide the removable tray into a rail in the sample compartment until the positioning pin is fully inserted.
• As the tray is inserted in the rail, the positions and the barcoded tubes are automatically identified by the
integrated barcode reader.
• On the interface, the tray is displayed with the free and occupied positions. Each identified position is
labelled with the corresponding icon.
For tubes from patients whose profile has already been sent through via a centralised computer or manually
programmed, the profile in the memory is automatically associated with the position.
• If the profile is not in the memory, the profile programming window opens (see Section 3-7, page 69).
• If the barcode is not read by the barcode reader or is missing for a position, the software opens a window
which allows the position to be identified.

• Then identify the position(s) not identified by the barcode reader (see Identify the positions of the tray
without barcode reading, page 63).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-6 61

Software version V 14
 Use
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment (continued)

! If positive identification has failed, the rail position is displayed in orange with “???” instead of
the removable tray representation.

• Should identification fail, repeat the procedure for putting the sample tray in position.
• If the rail is still not identified, the tray must be identified via the user interface.

If a barcode of one of the samples installed on the removable tray contains a %character the
tray is not identified and the rail position is displayed in orange with «???».

! In this case, remove the relevant sample from the tray, then place it again at its position with its
barcode label facing inwards. Once the removable tray is installed into the compartment, this
sample must be identified using the keyboard.

Configure a tray
• Click on the tray position:

• Select in the corresponding dialog boxes the type and number of the tray.
• Click on .
The corresponding tray is displayed on the interface, with each position considered to be occupied but not
identified. The software opens a window which allows the positions to be identified:

• Next, identify the occupied positions (see Identify the positions of the tray without barcode reading, page
63).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-6 62

Software version V 14
 Use
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment (continued)

Identify the positions of the tray without barcode reading

If the barcode identification fails for at least one position, or if the tray has been configured, a window is
displayed with the list of the positions occupied but not identified.
If the tray has been configured from the interface, each position is considered as occupied but not identified.
This window allows the positions to be identified by programming the identifier and the container type.

• Click on the box corresponding to the identifier to program.

• Use the keyboard to enter the identifier.
• Select the container type from the list.
• Use the keyboard to enter the barcode identifier.
• Repeat for each position of the list.
• When all the positions are identified, click on .
By default, the positions are identified as «specimen» .
A position may be identified as occupied by a calibrator or a control (see 3-6-3- Configure a position
without barcode, page 65).
• For tubes from patients whose profile has already been sent through via a centralised computer or manually
programmed, the profile in the memory is automatically associated with the position.
• If the profile is not in the memory, the profile programming window opens (see Section 3-7, page 69).

When the tray has been identified by the barcode reader, and when the window is
displayed, the tray can be removed to check identifier(s).

! In this case, information can be entered, but can only be validated only after replacing the
tray in the same position, with a new automatic identification.
Should automatic identification fail, the information will not be saved.
In this case, click on .

For the calibrators and controls supplied by IDS, enter the 12 figures from the barcode: the

! product, the lot number, the expiry date as well as the table of corresponding values are
automatically entered.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-6 63

Software version V 14
 Use
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment (continued)

3-6-2- Fixed tray

Take care when opening and closing the sample drawer: rough handling when opening and
! closing the drawer may cause the internal samples to spill.

• If the light is green, open the sample compartment.

Installation using a barcode

• Scan the barcode with the reader located on the front face. The analyser will beep when the barcode has
been correctly read.
• Within 10 seconds, place in a free position on the rack.
If the barcode is recognised, the analyser will beep a second time.
On the interface, the display will indicate that the position has been identified.
• If no second beep is heard, the position is considered to be occupied but not identified. In this case, re-start
the barcode reading and installation process.
• If the barcode label is illegible,remove the tube and click on .
• Use the keyboard to enter the barcode identifier.
• Select ‘Vial association with samples tray’ and click ‘OK’.
• Click on .
• Within 10 seconds, place in a free position on the rack.
If the association process is correct, the analyser will beep .
On the interface, the display will indicate that the position has been identified.
For tubes from patients whose profile has already been sent through via a centralised computer or manually
programmed, the profile in the memory is automatically associated with the position.
• If the profile is not in the memory, the profile programming window opens (see Section 3-7, page 69).

For the calibrators and controls supplied by IDS, enter the 12 figures from the barcode: the
! product, the lot number, the expiry date as well as the table of corresponding values are
automatically entered.

Installation without barcode

• Place the tube(s) or sample cup(s) in a free position on the tray.
• Click on the position which is occupied but not identified.
• The software opens a window which allows the position to be configured.
• Then configure the position (see 3-6-3- Configure a position without barcode, page 65).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-6 64

Software version V 14
 Use
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment (continued)

3-6-3- Configure a position without barcode

• Click on the position which is occupied but not identified (colour code: ) or on the position which is

identified (colour code: ).

The software opens a window which allows the position to be configured.

Calibrators and Controls

• Use the keyboard to enter the identifier (1 to 32 alphanumeric characters).
• Select from the following list:
• Calibrator.
• Control.
• Select the name from the list.
The active lot number is displayed, as well as the corresponding expiry date.
• Select the bottle number and the type of container.

• Click on .

Samples
• Use the keyboard to enter the identifier (1 to 32 alphanumeric characters).
• Select “type of product” as Sample and click on .
For samples whose profiles have already been programmed or sent through via a centralised computer, the
profile in the memory is automatically associated with the sample position.
• If the profile is not in the memory, the profile programming window opens (see Section 3-7, page 69).

Sample identifiers (barcodes or manual entries) must contain only alpha-numeric and blank
characters.

! Only these characters are recognized by the system.

Avoid the use of identifiers solely containing 12 numbers, similar to the barcode structure of
calibrators and controls provided by IDS.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-6 65

Software version V 14
 Use
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment (continued)

3-6-4- End of loading

• When all the samples have been installed, close the drawer.

Removable trays
If the analyser is initialised but not in the run cycle, the compartment remains unlocked and the assays will be
carried out as soon as the run cycle is started. Each on-board tray will be assayed whether defined for
automatic start or not.
If the analyser is in the run cycle, the compartment locks automatically.
For the trays defined for automatic start (in Rack Configuration menu), any new assays waiting to be carried
out are added to the analyser’s workload.
For the others, the new assays will be added to the analyser’s workload after clicking on the corresponding
button.

Fixed tray
If the analyser is initialised but not in the run cycle, the drawer remains unlocked and the assays will be carried
out as soon as the run cycle is started.
If the analyser is in the run cycle, the drawer locks automatically and any new assays waiting to be carried out
are added to the analyser’s workload.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-6 66

Software version V 14
 Use
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment (continued)

3-6-5- Colour codes associated with sample positions

Position free.

Position occupied but not identified.

Position identified.

Placement error: the product identified by barcode cannot be placed in the

sample tray.

Position occupied by a serum or plasma sample, profile associated.

Position occupied by a urine sample, profile associated.

Position occupied by a calibrator, calibration programmed.

Position occupied by a control, control programmed.

Position occupied by a calibrator, no associated request.

Position occupied by a control, no associated request.

3-6-6- Colour codes associated with removable trays

Rail free

Tray not used by the analyser

??? Tray detected but not identified

During the run cycle, the tray displays in green when all corresponding assays are completed, or if the option is
selected in SETTINGS LOCAL SYSTEM, when all corresponding assays are pipetted.
Lights are placed in front of each rail of the compartment:

Tray not used by the analyser

Tray in-use

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-6 67

Software version V 14
 Use
3-6- Loading of Calibrators, Controls or Samples in the Sample Compartment (continued)

3-6-7- Colour codes associated with position contour

The installed product is not or is no longer used in assay.
The product can be removed.

The installed product is scheduled in a list of assays which will be

progressively sent to the analyser.
The relevant assays are not yet taken into account by the analyser: the
programming can still be modified and, if necessary, the product can still be
removed.
A green colour code is displayed on the contour of a position whether the analyser is in pending mode or in
assay mode. During a run cycle, this code indicates that all the tests programmed for the sample are
completed or, when the option is selected in the menu SETTINGS LOCAL SYSTEM, that all the samplings
have been performed.
A blue colour code is shown only during a run cycle. The tests associated with this position have been
included in a predictive list of assays. This list is established according to test priority and according to the
order of the sample tray positions. As the tests have not yet been sent to the analyser, the sample
programming can still be modified.
This product can also be removed from the sample compartment. In this case, the predictive list of assays is
modified after excluding the relevant tests.
If this product is reloaded onto the sample compartment, the relevant assays are included at the end of the list
of assays. In this case, a new predictive list is established, following the same criteria. This product will be
processed after all the products with the same priority level, even if the product returned at its original position.
The blue colour code of the contour disappears when the tests are sent to the analyzer, at the moment when
the center of position turns to blue (assays in process).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-6 68

Software version V 14
 Use
3-7- Programming Samples

3-7- Programming Samples

If the analyser is not connected to a centralised computer system, the profiles to be carried out must be
programmed manually.
The samples are programmed either directly from their position on the sample compartment or from the work
list. In the latter case, the samples are programmed without an associated position.
• Click on the occupied position or click on in .
• For a sample programmed from the work list, enter the identifier (SID). For a sample programmed on the
sample tray, the identifier is displayed.

Sample identifiers (barcodes or manual entries) must not contain the character «%». This

! character is not recognized by the system.

Avoid the use of identifiers solely containing 12 numbers, similar to the barcode structure of
calibrators and controls provided by IDS.

• Select the container: PT (primary tube), cup, ST (secondary tube) etc.

• Select the type of sample: Serum/Plasma, Urine, Other.
- Serum/Plasma must be selected for each blood sample, whether collected in a dry tube (serum) or
collected in a tube containing anticoagulants (plasma),
- Urine must be used only when defined in the assay setup (refer to the reagent IFU),
- Other must be used when specified in the reagent IFU.

The validity of results obtained depends on the correct programming of the sample type.

! When samples other than serum, plasma or urine must be assayed, refer to the reagent IFU or
contact Technical Services.

• Enter the full name (optional field).

• Select the analyte(s) required by checking the box in front of the desired analyte.
• When an analyte is selected, a black tick is displayed.
• If an analyte has been selected by mistake, uncheck the box to deselect the analyte.
• Proceed in the same way with all analyses to be carried out.
When the profile has been programmed in full, click on .

! If the patient profile is programmed during the run cycle, the sample status may immediately
be displayed as loaded.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-7 69

Software version V 14
 Use
3-8- Assays

Do not open the analyser lid during the run cycle, as this will cause the moving parts to stop

! immediately for safety purposes and all assays underway will be lost.
The solid waste can contain 400 cuvettes. Empty the solid waste before to start the run cycle.

3-8- Assays
• Click on .
• If all the items required for carrying out the programmed workload are available, the analyser initialises and
begins aspirating samples.
• If any of the items required to carry out the programmed workload are missing, a window is opened which
lists them all.
• Install the missing items then click on . The analyser will begin aspirating samples.
• The run cycle monitoring window displays. After 30 seconds an estimated time for the end of processing all
the on-board samples is displayed.

The run cycle will start even if some items are missing.

! The analyser will then carry out all the assays for which all required items are available.
The missing items can be installed at any time during the assay by following the procedures
described below.

Comment:
For the removable-tray configuration, each on-board tray will be carried out, whether or not defined for
automatic start.

3-8-1- Performing assays

Assays are carried out in the following order:
• Calibrations.
• Controls.
• Emergency (STAT) samples.
• Samples.

At the run start, samples are tested in the order of the sample compartment positions.
A predictive list including all the tests that will be sent to the analyser is established when starting the run for all
the products installed onto the sample compartment, according to the priority order mentioned above. The
contour colour of each relevant position turns to blue.
Tests are sent to the analyser 5 at a time, up to a maximum of 90.
During a run cycle, a test may be terminated by the analyser as a result of certain faults, details of which can
be viewed by clicking the ‘Warning’ messages button. Faults may include:
• Calibration fails to comply with the criteria for automatic validation.
• The result of the control violates one of the Westgard rules (if activated).
• One of the reagents or a diluent required for the test has been detected as missing.
• One of the reagents or a diluent is empty.

When issues preventing test completion have been resolved, the test will be automatically restarted.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-8 70

Software version V 14
 Use
3-8- Assays (continued)

3-8-2- Adding samples during an assay

• If the analyser is not connected to a centralised computer system, programme the profile(s) to be performed
on the samples.
• If the light is green, open the sample compartment.

Removable trays
• Slide the removable tray containing the new samples into a rail in the sample compartment until the
positioning pin is fully inserted.
• The positions and the barcoded tubes are automatically identified by the integrated barcode reader as the
tray is inserted in the rail.
• On the interface, the tray is displayed with the free and occupied positions. Each identified position is
labelled with the corresponding icon.
For tubes from patients whose profile has already been sent through via a centralised computer or manually
programmed, the profile in the memory is automatically associated with the position.
• If the barcode is not read by the barcode reader or is missing for a position, identify the products installed
(see page 63).
• Proceed in the same way for other trays to be added.
• Close the compartment.
• The trays defined for automatic start are automatically added to the analyser’s workload.
• For the others, the new assays will be added to the analyser’s workload after clicking on the corresponding

button.

Fixed tray
• Scan the barcode with the reader located on the front face. The analyser will beep when the barcode has
been correctly read.
• Within 10 seconds, place the sample in a free position on the rack. If the sample is recognised, the analyser
will beep a second time. On the interface, the display will indicate that the position has been identified. If no
second beep is heard, the position is considered to be occupied but not identified. In this case, re-start the
barcode reading and installation process.
• If the barcode label is illegible, click on .
• Use the keyboard to enter the barcode identifier.
• Select ‘Vial association with samples tray’ and click ‘OK’.
• Select the appropriate identifier (Sample).
• Click on .
• Within 10 seconds, place the sample in a free position on the tray.
• Proceed in the same way for other samples to be added.
• Close the drawer.
• The analyser will resume sample aspiration once the drawer is locked.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-8 71

Software version V 14
 Use
3-8- Assays (continued)

3-8-3- Adding or replacing a reagent during an assay

• If the light is green, open the drawer.
• When replacing a reagent, remove the rack containing the reagent to be replaced.
• Slide the rack containing an Immunoassay reagent cartridge or a Biochemistry cartridge into a rail in the
refrigerated compartment until the positioning pin is inserted.
• The reagents are automatically identified by the barcode reader as the rack is inserted in the rail.
• On the interface, identified reagents are displayed in green with the corresponding lot number.
• If the reagent barcode is not read, identify the reagent manually by using the keyboard (see Section 3-2,
page 40).
• Repeat for all racks installed on the analyser, then close the drawer.
• The analyser will resume processing samples.

After loading a reagent into the compartment, the lag time before use is automatically
managed by the system.
The reagents must be stabilised at the temperature of the refrigerated compartment before

! use. Magnetic particles in Immunoassay cartridges must be sufficiently stirred.

Wait for 40 minutes after installing reagent cartridges before starting assays (20 min for
Biochemistry).
Any interruption of countdown before use may impair the analytical quality of results.

When the reagent compartment is opened, assays which are under way may be cancelled if
reagent aspiration was scheduled.

! In this case, the assays are automatically rescheduled.

To optimise analyser function, do not leave the reagent compartment open any longer than
necessary.

Do not remove reagent cartridges during the run cycle if in use.

! It is essential for Immunoassay reagent cartridges to remain on the analyser until all the results
are obtained.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-8 72

Software version V 14
 Use
3-8- Assays (continued)

3-8-4- Releasing an alarm during an assay

On the interface, a problem during an assay is indicated by a change in colour of the ALARM button from
green to red. The number of alarms is indicated in the ALARM button.
Some faults do not interrupt the run cycle (for example, lack of reagent or sample) and may be resolved in the
course of the run cycle.
Other faults will terminate assays (for example, lack of IDS-iSYS System Liquid, fault in a module, etc.). If a
module is faulty, the analyser will carry out the assays which do not use this module.
• Click on the ALARM button.
• The software opens the faults window and indicates the fault which has occurred.
• In the case of a lack of ancillaries (for example, IDS-iSYS Cuvettes or IDS-iSYS System Liquid) installing the
new ancillary and ensuring its barcode identifier is read by the barcode reader will automatically release the
fault.
• If the fault involves one of the internal ancillary reagents or the IDS-iSYS Wash solution, the run cycle must
be stopped before the fault can be resolved.
• For other faults, select the fault then click on .
• If the fault cannot be resolved during the assay, the software displays a message.
• Release this message, then either wait for the end of the current workload or request all assays to be
stopped.

Option «Clot detection»: releasing specific alarms

When a system is equipped with the option «Clot detection», two different alarms may occur during a run
cycle, either when a clot is detected during sampling, or if the probe is clogged. User intervention is required
after releasing one of these two alarms.
The message indicating that a clot is detected under the sampling needle can be resolved during the run cycle.
If the sampling probe is clogged, the cycle must be stopped and the message released.

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION
The probe is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a potential risk of
infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

Clot detected
When a clot is detected during sample pipetting, the arm stops over the position where the fault is detected
and the probe waits over the sample concerned.
• Select the fault then click on . The sampling probe moves up.
The following message displays:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-8 73

Software version V 14
 Use
3-8- Assays (continued)

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36). The sampling arm stays at its position.
• Install the specific protective tray under the probe while holding the sampling head.
• Remove the clot under the probe.
• Then clean the probe with an absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Remove the protective tray.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36), then click on . The cycle
resumes at the end of the rinse.

Probe blockage alarm

If the probe becomes clogged when dispensing into a cuvette or when rinsing, the arm stops at the position
where the fault is detected.

• Click on .
A message confirming the request displays:

• To stop the cycle, click on .

If assays are under way, the analyser finishes these before stopping.
• Then, select the fault and click on .
The following message displays:

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Install the specific protective tray under the probe while holding the sampling head.
• Unscrew the probe.
• Unclog the probe (see Section 5, 5-4-11- Unclogging the sample probe, page 141).
• Then clean the probe with an absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Click on . The following message displays:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-8 74

Software version V 14
 Use
3-8- Assays (continued)

• Reassemble the probe by screwing it in by hand as far as possible to avoid risk of leakage.
• Remove the protective tray.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36), then click on .
• Then, adjust the probe reference position (see Section 5, 5-4-10- Adjustment of probe reference position,
page 132).
• Click on to continue the run cycle.

3-8-5- Unloading samples during an assay

The contour colour of a position changes when all the tests associated with this position have been processed.
During the run cycle, a green contour indicates that all the tests have been completed. If the option is selected
in SETTINGS LOCAL SYSTEM, a green contour indicates the end of sampling for this position.
For the fixed-tray configuration, each position is individually managed.
For the removable-tray configuration, the entire tray is managed. The tray can be removed when all the
positions have been completed.

The option indicating the end of sampling does not take into account the dilution, if applicable,
when a result is outside the field of measurement.

! If a sample cannot be diluted, the corresponding identifier will be displayed as in error in the
work list.
The number of incomplete profiles is indicated in the status bar.

• If the light is green, open the sample compartment.

Removable trays
• Check that the light of the corresponding rail is green.
• Remove the tray(s).
• If necessary, install new tray(s).
• Close the sample compartment.

A completed tray can contain one or more positions in error (position code ).

! Each corresponding identifier will be displayed as in error in the work list.

The number of incomplete profiles is indicated in the status bar.

Fixed tray
• Remove each completed sample.
• If necessary, install new sample(s).
• Close the sample compartment.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-8 75

Software version V 14
 Use
3-8- Assays (continued)

3-8-6- Performing reflex tests

When reflex tests have been programmed for an analyte (see Section 7, 7-2- Defining reflex tests, page 156),
and when a patient result meets the defined conditions, depending on the option in the REFLEX TESTS menu,
additional assays can be:
- automatically added to the relevant profile,
- added to the profile either after accepting an automatic action or after using a specific button in the
profile edition.
Once the requests of the new assays are added to the profile, assays are carried out in the worklist after
calibrations, controls and STAT samples.
Any result of a reflex test is accompanied by the message RFX.
When the same assay is requested by several reflex tests, this assay is carried out once only.
Similarly, in the case of an analyte assayed in several replicates, a single request is programmed for each of
the reflex tests associated to this analyte.
Only a calculated result of a patient profile can generate reflex tests. A result of a reflex test (with message
RFX) will not generate reflex testing.

Option
As soon as the result of the analyte concerned by a reflex test meets the defined conditions, additional assays
are automatically added to the profile. The relevant assays are included in the list of assays and scheduled
after calibrations, controls and STAT samples according to the order of the sample compartment positions.

Option
An automatic action is generated by the system as soon as reflex tests must be carried out for a patient. The

appearance of this automatic action is indicated with the icon flashing in the WARNING button.
Reflex tests can be requested either by accepting the automatic action or from the relevant profile edition.

Accepting the automatic action

• From the main screen, click on the WARNING button.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-8 76

Software version V 14
 Use
3-8- Assays (continued)

• A reflex test request is accepted by clicking on .

Comment: the request generated automatically can be cancelled by clicking on . In this case, reflex
tests can be requested from the profile edition.

Programming from the profile edition

• Display the relevant profile from its position in the sample compartment (see page 86) or from the worklist
(see page 87).
• Click on to program the reflex tests.

• Then click on .

3-8-7- Performing dilutions

Depending on the option selected in the analytical configuration, a post dilution can be performed either:
- automatically,
- or after accepting an automatic une action or programming from the profile edition.

Option
Post dilution is automatically performed.

Option
When a patient must be diluted, an automatic action is generated by the system. The appearance of this

automatic action is indicated with the icon flashing in the WARNING button. A dilution can be requested
either by accepting the automatic action or by programming in the profile edition.
Accepting the automatic action
• From the main screen, click on the WARNING button.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-8 77

Software version V 14
 Use
3-8- Assays (continued)

Programming in the profile edition

• Click on the position occupied by the sample.
• Click in the box in front of the analyte for which a dilution must be performed:

• The post dilution is requested by selecting:

• Then click on .

Programming in the worklist

• Click on then select the relevant result.

• Click on :

• The post dilution is requested by selecting:

• Then click on .

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-8 78

Software version V 14
 Use
3-9- Adding an Emergency (STAT) Sample

3-9- Adding an Emergency (STAT) Sample

Emergency (STAT) samples can be programmed for all the sample tray positions.
If the profiles are sent through by a centralised computer system, the category of ‘STAT’ is already associated
with the profile. The priority of any sample can be raised to ‘STAT’ as long as it has not already been
incorporated into the analyser workflow (brown colour code).
Otherwise, the profile must be programmed before the sample is installed on the tray.

Sample identifiers (barcodes or manual entries) must not contain the character «%». This

! character is not recognized by the system.

Avoid the use of identifiers solely containing 12 numbers, similar to the barcode structure of
calibrators and controls provided by IDS.

• Click on then click on .

• Enter the identifier (SID).
• Select the container: PT (primary tube), cup, ST (secondary tube).
• Select the type of sample: Serum/Plasma, Urine, Other (see page 69).
• Click in front of ‘STAT’.
• Enter the full name (optional field).
• Then select the assays to be carried out by clicking in front of the desired analyte. When an assay is
selected, a black tick is displayed.
• When all the analyses to be carried out have been selected, click on .
• If the light is green, open the sample compartment.

Removable trays
• Install the tube on a removable tray. Slide the tray into a rail in the sample compartment until the positioning
pin is fully inserted.
• The positions and the barcoded tubes are automatically identified by the integrated barcode reader as the
tray is inserted in the rail.
• On the interface, the tray is displayed with the free and occupied positions. Each identified position is
labelled with the corresponding icon.
• If the barcode label is illegible, identify the products installed (see page 69).
• Proceed in the same way for other trays to be added.
• Close the compartment.
• The trays defined for automatic start are automatically added to the analyser’s workload.
• For the others, the new assays will be added to the analyser’s workload after clicking on the corresponding

button.

Fixed tray
• Scan the barcode with the reader located on the front face. The analyser will beep when the barcode has
been correctly read.
• Within 10 seconds, place the sample in a free position on the rack. If the sample is recognised, the analyser
will beep a second time. On the interface, the display will indicate that the position has been identified.
• If no second beep is heard, the position is considered to be occupied but not identified. In this case, re-start
the barcode reading and installation process.
• If the barcode label is illegible, click on , then select ‘Vial association with samples tray’.
• Use the keyboard to enter the barcode identifier, then select the appropriate identifier (Sample).
• Click on .
• Within 10 seconds, place the sample in a free position on the tray. The position is configured.
• Close the drawer again.
The analyser starts initiating tests again once the drawer is locked and deals with the ‘STAT’ sample
immediately.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-9 79

Software version V 14
 Use
3-10- Results

3-10- Results
As the run cycle progresses, the status of the sample tray position changes when all the tests associated with
this position have been completed.
The colour code associated with the output of results is as follows:

Calibrators / Controls / Samples: assays in process.

Calibrator: all calibrations are correct.

Control: all results are within the limits defined.
Samples: results calculated without any message.

Calibrators: Calibrations are completed but one of the parameters is not

within the criteria set for automatic validation.
Controls: all results are calculated but at least one of the results is outside
the limits defined.
Samples: all results are calculated but at least one of the results has an
attention message.

Calibrators / Controls / Samples: a lack of reagent/sample or another fault

prevents the requested assays being carried out in full.

Only when assays are stopped.

Calibrators / Controls / Samples: incomplete processing of another
workload. The assays programmed for this position were not completed
due to a problem encountered before the end of the assays.

Samples: the results are stored in accordance with the criteria defined for
automatic filing and received by a centralised computer system (if the
connection is activated).

Only when the connection with a centralised computer system is

activated.
Samples: the profile is completed but the results have not been
sent/received by a centralised computer system.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-10 80

Software version V 14
 Use
3-10- Results (continued)

3-10-1- Result of a calibration

• Click on .
• The list of tests from the personal library is displayed with the status of the last calibration performed for
each reagent lot on-board:

Calibration validated.

Calibration not validated.

Calibration correct with control(s) out-of-range.

• To display the calibration curve for a test, double-click on the reagent lot number.

• The software displays the date and the status of the calibration and controls. The value calculated for each
control associated with the calibration (QC1 for Biochemistry; QC1 to QC4 for Immunoassay), is also given.
• If the calibration is validated, the message OK is displayed.
• In the event of an invalid calibration, a message is displayed at the top of the screen indicating the cause
(see Section 4-1, page 105).
• When it is not possible to automatically validate a calibration, the button is displayed when
the user has a Supervisor level of access (or above).

When a calibration is displayed before each associated control has been calculated,
! and buttons are not displayed.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-10 81

Software version V 14
 Use
3-10- Results (continued)

The general tab shows whether a calibration has passed or not, type of
curve fit used, analyte it refers to and date of calibration. It also displays
data for the controls including target values, mean obtained values, CV%
and status (i.e. pass/fail).
Displays the calibration curve and each calibrator:
• Raw data obtained.
• Target value.
• Value calculated using the mathematic model of the calibration.
• Calibrator lot.
Displays value of coefficient of determination (r2).
Allows calculation of multiple-point calibrations after removing a calibrator.

Displays the RLU values for Immunoassays using the chemiluminescence

method or absorbancy values for methods using enzymatic detection.
For Biochemistry, reaction kinetics for each of the calibrators and controls
are displayed.
Displays traceability data for the modules and ancillary reagents used for
each replicate of the calibrators and controls.

Criteria For Validating a Calibration

• Calculated percentage of translation is lower than the programmed limit (Immunoassay).
• Percentage of the deviation on calibrator signal (RLU) is within acceptable limits provided by IDS
(Immunoassay).
• CV calculated with the RLU of each calibrator is lower than the acceptable limit defined for each calibrator;
when a limit is set at 0 or when the relevant option is selected (Calibration tab of the analytical configuration),
the CV is not verified (Immunoassay).
• Difference between the calculated and the target value (in %) is within the acceptable limit of curve fitting
defined for each calibrator. This criteria is not applied to calibrations with a master curve (Immunoassay).
• ODs of the blank and the reaction are within the programmed limits (Biochemistry).
• Sensitivity is higher than the programmed limit (Biochemistry).
• Coefficient of determination of the function calculated is higher than the programmed limit.
• Function corresponds to configured rules.
• Control(s) is (are) within acceptable limits.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-10 82

Software version V 14
 Use
3-10- Results (continued)

Invalid Calibration:
If the calibration is invalid, a message is displayed at the top of the screen indicating the cause
(see Section 4-1, page 105).
• Request a new calibration after having replaced failed calibrator/control.

The software allows the user to validate a calibration when not automatically validated.

The validation or modification of an invalid calibration requires a Supervisor level of access (or

! above).
The button is not displayed when user has an Operator level of access.

If the calibration is not valid, the button is displayed.

A calibration can be accepted under the user’s responsibility with or without modifications of the data used
for the calculation. The software allows for the exclusion of a calibrator from the calculation (Biochemistry only)
or for the exclusion of a replicate (Immunoassay only).

! If the reason for validation failure has been clearly identified and deemed to have no impact
on results, the calibration may be accepted at the discretion of the user.

• Accepting a calibration without modification

• In this case, click on the button.

The control(s) is (are) calculated,
• Any forcing of a calibration is recorded in the journal of events and all the results calculated with this
calibration are identified by the message ACP.
• Click on to save the modification.
• The assays which are already completed are calculated and those on standby are resumed.

• Possible modifications of a calibration

• Excluding a calibrator (Biochemistry only)

• To exclude a calibrator, click on to display calibration.

• Then click on the corresponding red tick.
• The calibration and the control(s) are calculated with the new curve equation.

• When points have been excluded, the icon is displayed with the calibration date.
• When the recalculated calibration is valid, with the control(s) within acceptable limits, the message OK is
displayed.
• Click on to save the modification.

• If the calibration is not validated, the button is displayed.

• In this case, request a new calibration after having replaced failed calibrator/control.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-10 83

Software version V 14
 Use
3-10- Results (continued)

• Excluding one of the replicates

For Immunoassay, individual outlying calibrator or control replicates can be excluded when the CV is above the
acceptable limit.

• Click on to display the measurements (RLU or mAbs.).

• To exclude one of the measurements, click on the corresponding red tick.
• The calibration and the control(s) are calculated with the new curve equation.

• When points have been excluded, the icon is displayed with the calibration date.
• When the recalculated calibration is valid, with the control(s) within acceptable limits, the message OK is
displayed.
• Click on to save the modification.

• If the calibration is not validated, the button is displayed.

• In this case, request a new calibration after having replaced failed calibrator/control.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-10 84

Software version V 14
 Use
3-10- Results (continued)

3-10-2- Result of controls

• Click on the position occupied by the control.
• The results obtained for this control are displayed along with the programmed limits of acceptance.
• A result outside the limits is displayed in red.
• A result which is not calculated is replaced by * * * * *.
• The results of the controls are automatically stored and recorded in Levey-Jennings charts and inspected
using the Westgard rules, if selected.
• The results of the control can be printed out from its position.
• If a control is outside the acceptable limits, the status of the calibration is displayed as Invalid.
• In this case, request a new calibration.

Westgard Rules Inspection

• If WESTGARD rules are selected for the test, the rules defined in the analytical configuration will be tested in
the following order:

Control
data

No
12s In control -> Accept run

Yes No

No No No No
13s R 4s 22s 41s 10x

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Out of control -> reject run

The violation of certain rules will generate automatic requests. In this event, the icon flashes in the
WARNING button.
• The violation of 2 2S, 4 1S, 10 X rules will automatically generate a request of calibration.
• Click on the WARNING button to open the window.

• Click on to request the calibration and the controls. If necessary, install the required calibrators and
controls on the analyser.
• To cancel the calibration request, click on . This action will be detailed in the Records.
• Then release to restart the test.
• All the results are identified by the message WE!.
• If another rule is violated, the test is stopped.
• Perform the necessary actions to correct the problem and request a calibration or a single control.
• Each time a violation occurs, a message displayed in the WARNING window allows the release of the
violation, whatever rule is violated.
• To release a test, click . This action will be detailed in the Records. All the results are identified by the
message WE!.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-10 85

Software version V 14
 Use
3-10- Results (continued)

3-10-3- Sample results

• Click on the position occupied by the sample.
• The results obtained are displayed with any associated messages.
• In the case of multiple replicates, the last result is displayed on a yellow contour.
• Double-click on the result to view the results for all replicates.
• To confirm a result, an analysis can be repeated. To do this, check the box in front of the analyte to be
repeated.
• The results can be printed out.
If the value cannot be calculated or is outside the field of measurement, the result is replaced by * * * * * .
* * * * * is always accompanied by a message (see 3-11- Messages Associated with Results , page 89).
If the value is outside the field of measurement, the following information is displayed:
- value below the field of measurement: the message OMR- is accompanied by «< Low limit of the
sample measurement range». When the field of measurement starts at 0, the result is replaced by * * *
* *.
- value above the field of measurement: the message OMR+ is accompanied by «> High limit of the
sample measurement range».
Limits are expressed in working units.
Comment:
When the message ORA accompanies the messages OMR- or OMR+, the result is not calculated and is
replaced by * * * * * .

If the analyser is connected to a centralised computer system, the information sent for results
outside the field of measurement depends on the selected connection protocol:
• ASTM Compatible: results are always sent in the format * * * * * ..

• ASTM V2 Compatible and ASTM V3 Compatible: results are sent in the following format:

! - OMR-: < Low limit of the sample measurement range, even when the measuring range
starts at 0.
- OMR+: > High limit of the sample measurement range.
Limits are expressed in working units.

Programming reflex tests

When reflex tests can be launched for a sample, the button is displayed.

• Click on to program the reflex tests.

The new analyse requests are added to the profile.
Comment: an analysis requested by a reflex test can be removed by unchecking the analysis.
• Then click on .

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-10 86

Software version V 14
 Use
3-10- Results (continued)

3-10-4- Work list results

• Click on then click .

• All the results obtained for each sample are displayed.

• To display the measurements conducted in relation to an analysis, double-click on the result.
• To repeat a test, select the result and click on .

• To print out the results, click on .

• To print out all the results of the work list, select “Print results” and click on .
Programming reflex tests
• Select the relevant profile.
• Double-click on the line to display the profile.

• Click on to program the reflex tests.

The new analyse requests are added to the profile.
Comment: an analysis requested by a reflex test can be removed by unchecking the analysis.
• Then click on .

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-10 87

Software version V 14
 Use
3-10- Results (continued)

The results of the work list can be displayed in tabular mode.

• At the top of the screen, select .

For each result, the display provides the calculated result ( column), the raw RLU measurement
( column), with their relevant units and the messages. A comma displayed after the last message
indicates that all the messages cannot be shown in the column. A double-click on the line will open a window
containing the full list of messages. For assays performed in replicates ( column), the mean of the
measurements and of the results are displayed in bold, accompanied by each corresponding CV.
Results are displayed in the order of positions in the sample compartment. Other sorting criteria may be
selected for the display by using one of the following options:

The selected option is retained for printing also.

• Click on to print the table.

• To print out all the results of the work list, select “Print results” and click on .

Programming reflex tests

• Open the relevant profile by double-clicking on the left part of the line, up to the «Analyte» column.

• Click on to program the reflex tests.

The new analyse requests are added to the profile.
Comment: an analysis requested by a reflex test can be removed by unchecking the analysis.
• Then click on .

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-10 88

Software version V 14
 Use
3-11- Messages Associated with Results

3-11- Messages Associated with Results

The results generated for samples are accompanied by a message (displayed in the column “MESSAGE”)
associated with a colour code.
If a result does not have a message attached, OK is displayed and the result is associated with a green colour
code.
If one of the messages listed below accompanies a result, an orange colour code is associated with the result
(displayed in “STATE” column).
The colour code is also passed on to patient level:
• Green = No message accompanies the results.
• Orange = At least one result has a message.

Message Meaning

ACP All fields

The calibration used for calculating the result was accepted with a Supervisor level of
access.

AIN Spectrophotometry
An absorbance is below the limit of reaction defined in the analytical configuration.
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

ASU Spectrophotometry
An absorbance exceeds the limit of reaction defined in the analytical configuration.
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result. The sample will be automatically diluted if a
dilution rate is defined in the analytical configuration.
If the ASU message accompanies the message “RED”, one of the absorbances is still
outside the limits of reaction defined after dilution.
In this case, the sample must be re-diluted to a level higher than that programmed in
the analytical configuration, then tested again.

BLR Biochemistry
Absorbance of blank outside the limits defined in the analytical configuration.

CDE Spectrophotometry
Slope of the kinetics has been calculated on a non-linear section of the reaction
(for KINETIC type of assay).
The coefficient of determination is lower than the limit value defined in the analytical
configuration.

CDI For the Clot Detection option

Clot detection is not active for this test.
The sample volume defined for the test is below the lower sample volume required by the
clot detection process.

CE All fields
Error when calculating a parameter calculated.

CLU Luminescence
The RLU measurement was corrected.
One measurement of the integrated signal, out of the scope of the luminometer, was
excluded and replaced by a point calculated by smoothing.

CT All fields
Temperature of the carousel outside limits or not stable during the assay.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-11 89

Software version V 14
 Use
3-11- Messages Associated with Results (continued)

Message Meaning

EDE! The calibration used for calculating the result was obtained with at least one calibrator
excluded.

FIB For the Clot Detection option

A clot was detected when pipetting on the sample.
All the calculated results must be verified.

HIGH Result higher than the higher normal value.

KIN! Spectrophotometry
The absorbances measured while monitoring the reaction are not strictly increasing or
decreasing (non-monotony of the reaction).
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

LOW Result lower than the lower normal value.

LS Spectrophotometry
The result was calculated from absorbencies measured with an unstable lamp.

MA The assay is no longer being requested by analyser.

MAR Luminescence
This message is applicable to semi-quantitative assays.
The luminescence signal measured is below the minimal acceptable signal.
In this case, the sample must be tested again.
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

MES Luminescence
Error when recovering the measurements.
Spectrophotometry
Error when recovering the measurements, or the result can not be calculated because the
number of measurements insufficient.

MRE! Luminescence
The calibration used for calculating the result was obtained with at least one relative light
unit (RLU) measurement excluded.

OMR It has not been possible to calculate the result because the calibration is not valid.
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

OMR- The result calculated is below the lower limit of the field of measurement.
«< Low limit of the sample measurement range» is displayed instead of the result.

0 with OMR- Luminescence

This message is applicable to semi-quantitative assays.
The result calculated is below the lower limit of the field of measurement and forced to 0:
the sample result can be reported as Negative.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-11 90

Software version V 14
 Use
3-11- Messages Associated with Results (continued)

Message Meaning

OMR+ The result calculated is above the upper limit of the field of measurement. The sample will
be automatically diluted if a dilution rate is defined in the analytical configuration.
«> High limit of the sample measurement range» is displayed instead of the result.
If the message OMR+ accompanies the message “RED”, the result is still higher than the
upper limit of the field of measurement after dilution.
In this case, the sample must be re-diluted to a level higher than that programmed in
the analytical configuration, then tested again.

ORA Luminescence
The result cannot be calculated as the measurement is outside the scope of the
measurements defined by the master curve. * * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

PMS Luminescence
Problem with luminometer stability.

RDE! Luminescence
The calibration used for calculating the result was obtained with one of the replicates for
calibrator excluded.

RDS Immunoassay
Problem with agitation of magnetic particles on the reagent rack.

REC The result was recalculated after modifying the calibration.

RED The result was calculated after a dilution. The value given takes into account the dilution
factor.

RFX Result obtained for a reflex test.

RT Storage temperature of reagents outside limits during the assay.

SUB Spectrophotometry
Detection of enzymatic hyperactivity. The change in absorbance per minute (∆A/min)
calculated between the injection of the sample and the first measurement used in the
calculation exceeds the programmed limit.
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result.
The sample will be automatically diluted if a dilution rate is defined in the analytical
configuration.
If the SUB message accompanies the message “RED”, enzymatic hyperactivity is still
detected after dilution.
In this case, the sample must be re-diluted to a level higher than that programmed in
the analytical configuration, then tested again.

SLU Luminescence
At least two measurements of the integrated signal are out of the scope of the
luminometer, * * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

TAM- Luminescence (if thermal compensation activated)

Ambient temperature lower than the acceptable limit.

TAM+ Luminescence (if thermal compensation activated)

Ambient temperature higher than the acceptable limit.

WE! One of the Westgard rules applied for this analyte has been violated.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-11 91

Software version V 14
 Use
3-11- Messages Associated with Results (continued)

Messages associated with semi-quantitative assays

Message Meaning

NEG The result is negative (below the defined threshold)

NORM The result is normal (within the defined thresholds)

POS The result is positive (above the defined threshold)

(+++) The result is positive (above the defined threshold)

(++) The result is positive (above the defined threshold).

(+) The result is positive (above the defined threshold).

(+/-) The result is uncertain.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-11 92

Software version V 14
 Use
3-12- Results Storage

3-12- Results Storage

When a sample is completed, it must be stored for the results to be archived in the IDS-iSYS software built in
database.
If automatic storage has been programmed in the LOCAL SYSTEM SETTINGS menu, the profile is stored as
soon as the profile is completed.
As soon as the position occupied by this sample is released, the profile is automatically transferred to storage.
All stored results can be viewed via the DATA menu under RESULTS STORAGE.
The results can be stored individually or in multiples.
• Click on then click .

• Select the relevant profile option to be stored (all profiles, selection, profiles without message),
then click .
The incomplete profiles can be stored when the analyser is not carrying out an assay.
This option automatically removes the analysis requests remaining in the profiles when storing the profiles.
• The stored profiles change to a yellow colour code.
• As soon as a position for which the profile has been stored is released, the profile will be available in results
storage.

! It is possible to request repeat analyses for a stored profile as long as the tube is still in the
sample compartment.

! In the STORAGE menu, results can be dispayed either in standard mode or in tabular mode.
The sorting options available in the work list menu can be applied to stored results.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-12 93

Software version V 14
 Use
3-12- Results Storage

• It is also possible to delete all the stored profiles from the work list.
• To do this, click on :

• Select “Profiles stored” and .

• All the stored profiles are deleted from the work list and transferred to analyser software’s database.

button is intended to remove profiles.

All the stored profiles deleted from the work list are transferred to analyser software’s database.
When using the options «Selection» or «All results», always verify that the relevant profiles have

! been stored prior to remove them (display the work list in «standard mode», stored profiles are
with a yellow colour code).
Otherwise, profiles that have not been previously stored are deleted from the work list and
definitively lost.
In tabular mode display, when a result is selected, all the profile is removed.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-12 94

Software version V 14
 Use
3-13- Quality Control Management

3-13- Quality Control Management

The results calculated for the controls are automatically stored for each reagent lot.
The results are recorded for each test and for each lot of reagent for cumulative analysis (Levey-Jennings) and,
depending on the analytical configuration, with Westgard rules for one or two levels of control.

3-13-1- Cumulative analysis

The results calculated for the controls are stored by reagent lot with the date and time of the assay. The results
are automatically recorded for cumulative examination. The results and the statistical calculations can be
displayed for a selected period of time (60 days maximum) including mean, standard deviation, CV and charts
(control results plotted around the mean value defined for the active lot).
The control data can be displayed by analyte or active lot. By selecting from the control lot, the data of the
stored lots can be displayed.

• In the DATA menu, select the following pathway:

• In the dropdown list «Analytes», select the desired analyte.

• The software displays the controls associated with this analyte. Then select the control in the relevant
dropdown list:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-13 95

Software version V 14
 Use
3-13- Quality Control Management

• The system displays the active lot of the selected control. Another lot can be selected in the relevant
dropdown list:

• Select the period of time required for display, then click on .

The results of the control are displayed for the selected time period.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-13 96

Software version V 14
 Use
3-13- Quality Control Management (continued)

• Select the control.

• The system displays the active lot of the selected control. Another lot can be selected in the relevant
dropdown list:

• Select the time period of interest, then click on .

• Then select the test in the relevant dropdown list.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-13 97

Software version V 14
 Use
3-13- Quality Control Management (continued)

• The software displays the control values for the selected time period along with the calculated mean,
standard deviation and CV.

To Exclude a Value from Statistical Calculation

The statistics can be calculated with values removed by clicking in the box in front of the date and time of the
result. The red tick indicates that this value has been removed from the calculation.
The chart is displayed by clicking on the tab.

3-13-2- Westgard rules

The Westgard rules are selected for each test in the QUALITY CONTROL tab of the analytical configuration,
with an application of 1 or 2 levels of control.

• In the DATA menu, select:

• Select the test and the time period of interest.

• For each run, the software displays the control measurement, the result of the selected Westgard rules
examination (IN CONTROL, OUT OF CONTROL or WARNING) and the violated rules.
• The chart can be display by clicking the tab.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-13 98

Software version V 14
 Use
3-13- Quality Control Management (continued)

The rules to apply are selected for each test in the 6 rules defined as follows:

1 2s One control measurement exceeds the limits of x ± 2s.

This rule provides a WARNING and an additional inspection with the other rules.
1 3s One control measurement exceeds the limits of x ± 3s. This rule is sensitive to random
errors.
The run is judged to be OUT OF CONTROL.
2 2s Two consecutive measurements within the run exceed the same limit either x - 2s or x + 2s.
This rule is sensitive to systematic errors.
This rule is applied to the same control level or on different control levels:
one measurement of each control exceeds the same limit.
The run is judged to be OUT OF CONTROL.
R 4s The range between the high and low control measurements within a run exceeds 4s. This
rule is sensitive to random errors.
This rule is applied on the same control level and on different control levels: one
measurement exceeds the +2s limit and the other exceeds the -2s limit.
The run is judged to be OUT OF CONTROL.
4 1s 4 consecutive control measurements within or across a run exceeds the same limit, either x
- 1s or x + 1s. This rule is sensitive to systematic errors.
This rule is applied on the same control level or on different control levels:
4 consecutive measurements across control levels exceed the same limit,
either x - 1s or x + 1s.
The run is judged to be OUT OF CONTROL.
10 x 10 consecutive control measurements fall on one side of the mean. This rule is sensitive to
systematic errors.
This rule is applied on the same control level or on different control levels
The run is judged to be OUT OF CONTROL.

Rules Inspection:
The rules defined in the set-up test will be tested in the following order:

Control
data

No
12s In control -> Accept run

Yes No

No No No No
13s R 4s 22s 41s 10x

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Out of control -> reject run

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-13 99

Software version V 14
 Use
3-14- Switching The Analyser Off

3-14- Switching The Analyser Off

The analyser remains in assay mode until the run cycle is stopped.
Assays must be stopped in order to carry out maintenance procedures.
• Click on .
A message confirming the request displays:

• To stop the cycle, click on .

If assays are under way, the analyser finishes these before stopping.
Comment: The request to stop the run cycle can be cancelled by clicking on .
• Check that all the profiles are completed and that there are no unfinished profiles. The latter are displayed in
purple and their number is indicated on the status bar at the bottom of the screen.
• If all the profiles are completed, open the drawer and remove all samples.
• If reagent cartridges are not intended to be stored on-board, remove reagent racks and store in accordance
with IFU recommendations.
• Carry out daily maintenance, then if necessary, weekly and monthly maintenance.
• If the reagent drawer is equipped with a condensation waste, empty the drip tray if necessary.
• Empty the solid waste tray (see 3-14-1- Emptying the solid waste, page 101) and the liquid waste if
necessary (see 3-14-2- Emptying the liquid waste, page 102).
• Waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations (see APPENDIX I: Waste disposal,
page A2).

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

Waste which contains, or has been in contact with, biological specimens must be
considered to pose a potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves when handling waste.
The waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations.

• Check that the work list is empty. If necessary, delete profiles that are no longer required.
• Check the time and date of “wake-up” programmed in the SYSTEM SETTINGS menu if applicable.
• From the Session menu, select SHUT DOWN to put the analyser into standby mode.

! For systems using DSORB solution, a maintenance procedure for the four washers will take
place automatically during the SHUT DOWN procedure.

! Do not turn off the computer in standby mode.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-14 100

Software version V 14
 Use
3-14- Switching The Analyser Off (continued)

3-14-1- Emptying the solid waste

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

Waste which contains, or has been in contact with, biological specimens must be
considered to pose a potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves when handling waste.
The waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations.

• Open the compartment by pushing on the cover, then remove the waste tray.

With re-usable solid waste

• Empty the content of the solid waste tray into a container reserved for disposal of biological waste.
Waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations (see APPENDIX I: Waste disposal,
page A2).
• Decontaminate the solid waste tray (see Section 5, 5-5-1- Decontaminating the containers of solid and
liquid wastes, page 147).

With disposable solid waste container

• Remove the disposable container from the solid waste tray.

• Discard the disposable solid waste container and its content into a container reserved for disposal of
biological waste.
Waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations (see APPENDIX I: Waste disposal,
page A2).
• Install a new disposable container into the solid waste tray.

• Return the waste tray inside its compartment.

• Close the cover by pushing on it until it remains locked.
• Then release the solid waste alarm by clicking on .
• Click on the solid waste icon.
A confirmation message displays.
• Click on to confirm the emptying of the waste.
• Exit the ancillaries management window.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-14 101

Software version V 14
 Use
3-14- Switching The Analyser Off

3-14-2- Emptying the liquid waste

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

Waste which contains, or has been in contact with, biological specimens must be
considered to pose a potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves when handling waste.
The waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations.

• Remove the level sensor from the container collecting the liquid waste.
• Treat liquid waste prior to disposal in accordance with current local regulations (see APPENDIX I: Waste
disposal, page A2).
• Decontaminate the liquid waste container (see Section 5, 5-5-1- Decontaminating the containers of solid
and liquid wastes, page 147).
• Replace the level sensor in the empty waste container.
• Then release the solid waste alarm by clicking on .
• Click on the liquid waste icon.
A confirmation message displays.
• Click on to confirm the emptying of the waste.
• Exit the ancillary management window.

The container provided by IDS is intended to be used for liquid waste collection and is not

! suitable either for storage, or for transport of liquid waste.

The responsibility for checking when to replace this reusable container lies entirely with the
user.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-14 102

Software version V 14
 Use
3-15- Switching The Analyser Off Completely

3-15- Switching The Analyser Off Completely

• Remove all the reagents installed on the reagent rack.

• From the File menu, click on EXIT, the software will close.

• Then turn off the computer following the procedure for shutting down WINDOWS.

• Finally, press the switch located on the left-hand side of the analyser into position ‘0’.

In order to maintain the performance of the operating system, the computer must be turned off
! one time per week.

When the analyser has been inactive for more than two days, a specific procedure must be

! applied depending on duration of the stoppage (see Appendix A-6- Analyser long stop period,
page A-8).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Use 3-15 103

Software version V 14
SECTION!4:
Messages
 Section 4

Messages 104

4-1- Messages Associated with Calibrations 105

4-2- Messages Associated with Calibration Controls 107
4-3- Messages Associated with Results 108
4-4- Warning Messages 112
4-5- Error Messages 113

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 104

Software version V 14
 Messages
4-1- Messages Associated with Calibrations

4-1- Messages Associated with Calibrations

If a calibration fails to meet the criteria for automatic validation, the calibration status is represented by a

red half circle.

For Biochemistry, the corresponding assays will not be processed by the analyser until a new calibration is
carried out and is correct, or until the calibration is forced. In the case of Immunoassays assays will be
processed but values will not be calculated until an new calibration is carried out and is correct, or until the
calibration is forced.
Messages associated with the calibrations are displayed with the calibration curve.
Message Meaning

Abs. out of range Spectrophotometry

One of the calibrator replicates’ absorbances is outside the limits specified in
the analytical configuration for the test.
Blank out of range Biochemistry
The reagent blank is outside the limits specified in the analytical configuration
of the test.
Fail of calibration All fields
calculation The calibration could not be calculated.

Sensitivity out of range Biochemistry

The sensitivity calculated is lower than the value specified in the analytical
configuration.
Determination coefficient Biochemistry
too low The determination coefficient calculated for the calibration curve is lower than
the value specified in the analytical configuration.
Monotony Problem Biochemistry - Immunoassay
The calibration has not been calculated as the curve is not strictly increasing
or decreasing.
Tolerance out of range Immunoassay
The deviation between the relative light unit (RLU) obtained for one of the
calibrators and the measurement of the last calibration is higher than the
percentage specified in the analytical configuration.
The ETO message is displayed with the corresponding calibrator in the
tab.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Messages 4-1

105
Software version V 14
 Messages
4-1- Messages Associated with Calibrations (continued)

Message Meaning

CV tolerance has failed on Immunoassay

at least one of the The CV calculated for one of the calibrators replicates is higher than the
calibrators percentage specified in the analytical configuration.
The CVM message is displayed with the corresponding calibrator in the
tab.

Control out of range All fields

The control carried out with the calibration has not been calculated or is
outside the limits of acceptability.
Determination coefficient Biochemistry
too low for one assay The slope of the kinetics calculated for one of the calibrators was calculated
on a non-linear section of the curve.
No control for checking All fields
The control measurements requested with the calibration have not been
performed. Calibration is not considered to be valid.
Out of the activity limits Biochemistry
The slope of the kinetics calculated for one of the calibrators is higher than
the limit value of activity specified in the analytical configuration, or enzymatic
hyperactivity was detected.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Messages 4-1 106

Software version V 14
 Messages
4-2- Messages Associated with Calibration Controls

4-2- Messages Associated with Calibration Controls

When the controls carried out with the calibration do not meet the criteria for automatic validation, the status of
each control is represented by a red circle in the appropriate column(s) (e.g. QC3) and by a red half-circle in the
calibration column.
For Biochemistry assays, only QC1 is carried out with the calibration.
In this case, the corresponding assays will not be processed by the analyser until a new calibration has been
carried out and is correct, or until the calibration is forced. The messages associated with the calibration
control are displayed with the calibration curve in the control section.

Message Meaning

Failed: calibration! Biochemistry - Immunoassay

The control was not calculated as the calibration is invalid.

Failed: range! or CV All fields

The value calculated for the control is outside the limits of acceptability.
These limits of acceptability are calculated from data supplied for the control
lot.
Failed: calculation! Biochemistry - Immunoassay
The control value was not calculated due to incomplete data generation.

Failed: system! All fields

The control value was calculated while the system was on alert (lamp or
luminometer not stabilized, temperatures outside the limits)

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Messages 4-2 107

Software version V 14
 Messages
4-3- Messages Associated with Results

4-3- Messages Associated with Results

Results calculated for samples are accompanied by a colour-coded message (displayed in the column
“STATE”).
If a result does not have a message associated with it, “OK” is displayed in the “Message” column (green
colour code associated).
If a result is accompanied by one of the following messages, an orange colour code is associated.

Message Meaning

ACP All fields

The calibration used for calculating the result was accepted with a Supervisor level of
access.

AIN Spectrophotometry
An absorbance is below the limit of reaction defined in the analytical configuration.
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

ASU Spectrophotometry
An absorbance exceeds the limit of reaction defined in the analytical configuration.
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result. The sample will be automatically diluted if a
dilution rate is defined in the analytical configuration.
If the ASU message accompanies the message “RED”, one of the absorbances is still
outside the limits of reaction defined after dilution.
In this case, the sample must be re-diluted to a level higher than that programmed in
the analytical configuration, then tested again.

BLR Biochemistry
Absorbance of blank outside the limits defined in the analytical configuration.

CDE Spectrophotometry
Slope of the kinetics has been calculated on a non-linear section of the reaction
(for KINETIC type of assay).
The coefficient of determination is lower than the limit value defined in the analytical
configuration.

CDI For the Clot Detection option

Clot detection is not active for this test.
The sample volume defined for the test is below the lower sample volume required by the
clot detection process.

CE All fields
Error when calculating a parameter calculated.

CLU Luminescence
The RLU measurement was corrected.
One measurement of the integrated signal, out of the scope of the luminometer, was
excluded and replaced by a point calculated by smoothing.

CT All fields
Temperature of the carousel outside limits or not stable during the assay.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Messages 4-3 108

Software version V 14
 Messages
4-3- Messages Associated with Results (continued)

Message Meaning

EDE! The calibration used for calculating the result was obtained with at least one calibrator
excluded.

FIB For the Clot Detection option

A clot was detected when pipetting on the sample.
All the calculated results must be verified.

HIGH Result higher than the higher normal value.

KIN! Spectrophotometry
The absorbances measured while monitoring the reaction are not strictly increasing or
decreasing (non-monotony of the reaction).
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

LOW Result lower than the lower normal value.

LS Spectrophotometry
The result was calculated from absorbencies measured with an unstable lamp.

MA The assay is no longer being requested by analyser.

MAR Luminescence
This message is applicable to semi-quantitative assays.
The luminescence signal measured is below the minimal acceptable signal.
In this case, the sample must be tested again.
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

MES Luminescence
Error when recovering the measurements.
Spectrophotometry
Error when recovering the measurements, or the result can not be calculated because the
number of measurements insufficient.

MRE! Luminescence
The calibration used for calculating the result was obtained with at least one relative light
unit (RLU) measurement excluded.

OMR It has not been possible to calculate the result because the calibration is not valid.
«> High limit of the sample measurement range» is displayed instead of the result.

OMR- The result calculated is below the lower limit of the field of measurement.
«< Low limit of the sample measurement range» is displayed instead of the result.

0 with OMR- Luminescence

This message is applicable to semi-quantitative assays.
The result calculated is below the lower limit of the field of measurement and forced to 0:
the sample result can be reported as Negative.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Messages 4-3 109

Software version V 14
 Messages
4-3- Messages Associated with Results (continued)

Message Meaning

OMR+ The result calculated is above the upper limit of the field of measurement. The sample will
be automatically diluted if a dilution rate is defined in the analytical configuration.
«> High limit of the sample measurement range» is displayed instead of the result.
If the message OMR+ accompanies the message “RED”, the result is still higher than the
upper limit of the field of measurement after dilution.
In this case, the sample must be re-diluted to a level higher than that programmed in
the analytical configuration, then tested again.

ORA Luminescence
The result cannot be calculated as the measurement is outside the scope of the
measurements defined by the master curve. * * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

PMS Luminescence
Problem with luminometer stability.

RDE! Luminescence
The calibration used for calculating the result was obtained with one of the replicates for
calibrator excluded.

RDS Immunoassay
Problem with agitation of magnetic particles on the reagent rack.

REC The result was recalculated after modifying the calibration.

RED The result was calculated after a dilution. The value given takes into account the dilution
factor.

RFX Result obtained for a reflex test.

RT Storage temperature of reagents outside limits during the assay.

SUB Spectrophotometry
Detection of enzymatic hyperactivity. The change in absorbance per minute (∆A/min)
calculated between the injection of the sample and the first measurement used in the
calculation exceeds the programmed limit.
* * * * * is displayed instead of the result.
The sample will be automatically diluted if a dilution rate is defined in the analytical
configuration.
If the SUB message accompanies the message “RED”, enzymatic hyperactivity is still
detected after dilution.
In this case, the sample must be re-diluted to a level higher than that programmed in
the analytical configuration, then tested again.

SLU Luminescence
At least two measurements of the integrated signal are out of the scope of the
luminometer, * * * * * is displayed instead of the result.

TAM- Luminescence (if thermal compensation activated)

Ambient temperature lower than the acceptable limit.

TAM+ Luminescence (if thermal compensation activated)

Ambient temperature higher than the acceptable limit.

WE! One of the Westgard rules applied for this analyte has been violated.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Messages 4-3 110

Software version V 14
 Messages
4-3- Messages Associated with Results (continued)

Messages associated with semi-quantitative assays

Message Meaning

NEG The result is negative (below the defined threshold)

NORM The result is normal (within the defined thresholds)

POS The result is positive (above the defined threshold)

(+++) The result is positive (above the defined threshold)

(++) The result is positive (above the defined threshold).

(+) The result is positive (above the defined threshold).

(+/-) The result is uncertain.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Messages 4-3 111

Software version V 14
 Messages
4-4- Warning Messages

4-4- Warning Messages

Warning messages are displayed in the WARNING window, either before the start, or during the run cycle.
If messages affecting the operation of the current workload appear, the button is displayed in orange with the
number of messages indicated.
The appearance of certain types of message is also indicated with a flashing icon:

•
A request for calibration, QC1, QC2 or QC3 has been generated automatically.
These requests are generated in the following cases:
• No calibration in the memory for the analytes requested.
• Reagent lot present in the compartment is out of date.
• For Biochemistry if certain Westgard rules have been violated, a request for calibration or control is
generated depending on the rule in question.
• The calibration and/or control(s) will be carried out after acceptance by the user (by clicking ): If
the user does not want to accept these actions, it is possible to cancel the request by clicking .
This action will be detailed in the Records.

•
Daily, weekly or monthly maintenance has not been carried out.
Messages are displayed by clicking on the WARNING button. If items are missing, the installation of
the item automatically deletes the message.

Depending on the nature of the message, certain tests may stop. In this case, the analyser will

! not be able to complete the entire workload. To carry out the entire workload without affecting
the deadline for producing the results, it is important to act upon the messages as soon as
possible.

•
The temperatures of the carousel and the reagent compartment are continually monitored. If, during
operations, one of the temperatures is outside the acceptable limits, the analyser will continue to carry
out assays and the icon will be displayed in the SYSTEM STATUS button.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Messages 4-4 112

Software version V 14
 Messages
4-5- Error Messages

4-5- Error Messages

Error messages appear in the ALARM button which is displayed in red with the number of faults indicated.
Alarms are classified into two categories.
Errors in modules
• These errors indicate that one of the elements of the analyser is no longer operational (for example, the
diluter, transfer arm, cuvette loader, carousel, etc.).
• The analyser will continue with the workload without using this module, or if this is not possible to carry out
any new assays, the samples being measured will be terminated.
• For resolution, select the error then click .
• If the error cannot be resolved during the run cycle, the system will display a message.
• Release this message, then either wait for the workload under way to complete, or ask for the run cycle to
be stopped.
• The fault must be released again after stopping the run cycle. At the time of release, the element concerned
is automatically initialised.

Errors in drawer elements

• These errors indicate either a lack of an item or that an item loaded on the analyser is unusable.
• The analyser will continue with the workload without using this item, or, if this is not possible, the samples
being measured will be terminated.
• In the event of a lack of reagents, sample, IDS-iSYS Cuvettes or IDS-iSYS System Liquid, the installation of
the new item using the barcode reader will automatically release the fault.
• Please note that if the error involves one of the other ancillaries (for example, IDS-iSYS Wash Solution) the
error must be resolved after stopping the run cycle.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Messages 4-5 113

Software version V 14
SECTION!5:
Maintenance
 Section 5
Maintenance 114

5-1- Daily Maintenance 115

5-1-1- General Maintenance 116
5-1-1-1- Checking reagent drawer and Plexiglas® 116
5-1-1-2- Checking sample drawer and Plexiglas® 116
5-1-1-3- Cleaning needle exterior 117
5-1-1-4- Decontamination of the probe 117
5-2- Weekly Maintenance 118
5-2-1- General Maintenance 119
5-2-1-1- Cleaning the reagent compartment and Plexiglas® 119
5-2-1-2- Cleaning the sample tray and Plexiglas® 119
5-2-1-3- Cleaning the rinsing well 120
5-2-1-4- Checking dilutors and IDS-iSYS System Liquid pumps 120
5-2-2- Immunoassay Maintenance 121
5-2-2-1- Rinsing of the IDS-iSYS Triggers tubing 121
5-3- Monthly Maintenance 122
5-3-1- General Maintenance 122
5-3-1-1- Cleaning the IDS-iSYS System Liquid pump shafts 122
5-3-1-2- Cleaning the liquid waste pump shaft 122
5-3-1-3- Cleaning the IDS-iSYS D-Sorb pump and level sensor shafts 123
5-3-1-4- Cleaning the liquid waste level sensor 123
5-3-1-5- Checking lamp references 124
5-3-1-6- Switch off the instrument! 124
5-3-2- Immunoassay Maintenance 124
5-3-2-1- Cleaning the IDS-iSYS Wash Solution pump and level sensor shafts 124
5-3-2-2- Rinsing of the AP Substrate tubing 125
5-4- Analyser Interventions 126
5-4-1- Replacement of lamp 126
5-4-2- Replacement of probe 127
5-4-3- Replacement of primary fuses 128
5-4-4- Replacement of secondary fuses 129
5-4-5- Replacement of IDS-iSYS Wash Solution pump (Immunoassay) 130
5-4-6- Replacement of IDS-iSYS System Liquid pump 130
5-4-7- Replacement of liquid waste pump 130
5-4-8- Replacement of IDS-iSYS D-Sorb pump 131
5-4-9- Removal of the on-board IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube 131
5-4-10- Adjustment of probe reference position 132
5-4-10-1- Adjustment procedure for analyser without lid locking system 133
5-4-10-2- Adjustment procedure for analyser with lid locking system 136
5-4-11- Unclogging the sampling probe 141
5-4-12- Intervention in System Configuration menu 143
5-4-13- Repeat an automatic maintenance 145
5-4-13-1- Washer needle cleaning 145
5-4-13-2- Cleaning the probe 145
5-5- Analyser Cleaning 146
5-5-1- Decontaminating the containers of solid and liquid waste 147

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 114

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-1- Daily Maintenance

5-1- Daily Maintenance

In the MAINTENANCE menu, select DAILY MAINTENANCE:

Daily maintenance activities are presented under a single tab. Certain maintenance activities are carried out
automatically by the system whilst others must be carried out by the operator. In both cases, the maintenance
activities are recorded.

WARNING:
OPENING/CLOSING THE LID
The lid must be opened for this operation.
Always handle the lid carefully during opening and closing.
The lid must always be fully open and the lid support tool must always be
installed.
Take care not to knock the lid during any analyser intervention.
When the lid is not fully open there is a risk of it falling.
During closing, maintain the lid open when removing the lid support tool, to avoid any
risk of accidental falling.

If the analyser is equipped with a locking system, unlock lid before selecting the
! MAINTENANCE menu (see page 35).
Close the lid when all maintenance procedures are complete (see page 36).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-1 115

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-1- Daily Maintenance (continued)

5-1-1- General Maintenance

5-1-1-1- Checking reagent drawer and Plexiglas®

! Do not use any spray products on the analyser.

• Open the reagent compartment drawer.

• Check that no trace of reagent is present on the base plate of the compartment If traces of reagent are
evident, use absorbent paper to clean the rails.
• Then use a disinfectant wipe/solution suitable for medical devices.
• Check that there are no traces of liquid on the Plexiglas® over the reagent compartment. If traces of liquid
are evident, use absorbent paper to remove them.
• Close the drawer.
• When maintenance is complete, click on the corresponding , then confirm the
maintenance by clicking on YES.

5-1-1-2- Checking sample drawer and Plexiglas®

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION
These parts of the analyser are in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore,
a potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

! Do not use any spray products on the analyser.

• Open the sample compartment drawer.

• Check that no trace of liquid is present on the surface of the fixed or removable sample tray. If traces of
liquid are evident, use absorbent paper to clean the surface of the sample tray. Then use a disinfectant wipe/
solution suitable for medical devices.
• Close the drawer.
• Open the lid (see page 35) and check that there are no traces of liquid on the Plexiglas® over the sample
tray. If traces of liquid are evident, use absorbent paper to remove.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• When maintenance is complete, click on the corresponding , then confirm the
maintenance by clicking on YES.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-1 116

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-1- Daily Maintenance (continued)

5-1-1-3- Cleaning needle exterior

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION
This part of the analyser is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a
potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Gently clean the probe with a cloth soaked in deionized water to remove traced on the needle.
• Then use absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl) to decontaminate the needle.
• When the cleaning procedure is finished, verify the tightness of the needle.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).

! Handle the probe with care. Do not twist or bend the probe during cleaning.

5-1-1-4- Decontamination of the probe

! This maintenance activity is managed only for systems using DSORB solution.
For other systems, this maintenance activity is not required.

• Check that IDS-iSYS D-Sorb solution is present on the analyser.

• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in the maintenance list.

• Click . The probe will automatically aspirate the IDS-iSYS D-Sorb solution.
• When maintenance is completed without any error, the date and time it is carried out are recorded.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-1 117

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-2- Weekly Maintenance

5-2- Weekly Maintenance

In the MAINTENANCE menu, select WEEKLY MAINTENANCE:

The weekly maintenance procedures are presented under two tabs: General and Immunology. Certain
maintenance activities are carried out automatically by the system whilst others must be carried out by the
operator. In both cases, the maintenance activities are recorded.

WARNING:
OPENING/CLOSING THE LID
The lid must be opened for this operation.
Always handle the lid carefully during opening and closing.
The lid must always be fully open and the lid support tool must always be
installed.
Take care not to knock the lid during any analyser intervention.
When the lid is not fully open there is a risk of it falling.
During closing, maintain the lid open when removing the lid support tool, to avoid any
risk of accidental falling.

If the analyser is equipped with a locking system, unlock lid before selecting the
! MAINTENANCE menu (see page 35).
Close the lid when all maintenance procedures are complete (see page 36).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-2 118

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-2- Weekly Maintenance (continued)

5-2-1- General Maintenance

5-2-1-1- Cleaning the reagent compartment and Plexiglas®

! Do not use any spray products on the analyser.

• Open the reagent compartment drawer.

• Clean the upper lid with absorbent paper soaked in de-ionised water.
• Clean the compartment base plate with absorbent paper soaked in de-ionised water. Then use a disinfectant
wipe/solution suitable for medical devices.
• Close the drawer.
• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Clean the Plexiglas® over the reagent compartment with absorbent paper soaked in de-ionised water. Then
use a disinfectant wipe/solution suitable for medical devices.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• When maintenance is complete, click on the corresponding , then confirm the
maintenance by clicking on YES.

5-2-1-2- Cleaning the sample tray and Plexiglas®

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

This part of the analyser is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a
potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

! Do not use any spray products on the analyser.

• Open the sample drawer.

• Clean the surface of the fixed or removable tray with a disinfectant wipe/solution suitable for medical
devices.

WARNING:
RISK OF INJURY

If a position of the fixed tray has to be cleaned, take care not to push the wipe into
the position with your finger.
Risk of cuts from the detection sensors.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-2 119

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-2- Weekly Maintenance (continued)

• Close the drawer.

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Clean the Plexiglas® over the tray with absorbent paper soaked in de-ionised water. Then use a disinfectant
wipe/solution suitable for medical devices.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• When maintenance is complete, click on the corresponding , then confirm the
maintenance by clicking on YES.

5-2-1-3- Cleaning the rinsing well

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

This part of the analyser is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a
potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Pour alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl) into the rinsing well.
• Use a cotton bud soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl) to clean the well.

• When maintenance is complete, click on the corresponding , then confirm the

maintenance by clicking on YES.

5-2-1-4- Checking dilutors and IDS-iSYS System Liquid pumps

• Remove the cover from the right-hand hand side of the analyser.
• Check for any leaks on the tubing connections at the outlet of each dilutor.
• Check for any leaks on the IDS-iSYS System Liquid pumps.
• Replace the cover.
• When maintenance is complete, click on the corresponding , then confirm the
maintenance by clicking on YES.

! This maintenance activity can be carried out with the lid opened.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-2 120

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-2- Weekly Maintenance (continued)

5-2-2- Immunoassay Maintenance

5-2-2-1- Rinsing of the IDS-iSYS Triggers tubing
• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Prepare two 250 mL bottles containing de-ionised water to mimic the IDS-iSYS Triggers.
• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in the maintenance list.
• Follow the on-screen instructions.
• When maintenance is completed without any error, the date and time are recorded.

! This procedure can be carried out with the lid opened.

When this maintenance is completed, proceed to the weekly shutdown of the computer:
• From the File menu, click on EXIT, the software will close.
• Then turn off the computer following the procedure for shutting down WINDOWS.
• Switch the computer on, then open the software by double-clicking on the IDS-iSYS icon.
• Once the software is open, enter your access code to open a session.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-2 121

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-3- Monthly Maintenance

5-3- Monthly Maintenance

In the MAINTENANCE menu, select MONTHLY MAINTENANCE :

The monthly maintenance activities are presented under two tabs: General and Immunology. Certain
maintenance activities are carried out automatically by the system whilst others must be carried out by the
operator. In both cases, the maintenance activities are recorded.

! If the analyser is equipped with a locking system, unlock lid before selecting the
MAINTENANCE menu (see page 35).

5-3-1- General Maintenance

5-3-1-1- Cleaning the IDS-iSYS System Liquid pump shafts
• Remove the cover located on the right-hand side of the analyser.
• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in the maintenance list.
No spindle must rotate while this maintenance is being carried out.
• Release the pump body from its shaft by pinching the two clips at either side and gently pulling, ensuring the
tubes remain connected.
• Clean the pump shaft with absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Return the pump body to its shaft.
• Carry out this procedure for the other pumps.
• When maintenance is completed, click . The date and time it is carried out are recorded.

5-3-1-2- Cleaning the liquid waste pump shaft

• Click on box located in front of this maintenance.
No spindle must rotate while this maintenance is being carried out.
• Release the pump body from its shaft by pinching the two clips at either side and gently pulling, ensuring the
tubes remain connected.
• Clean the pump shaft with absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Return the pump body to its shaft.
• Carry out this procedure for the other pump.
• When maintenance is completed, click on . The date and time it is carried out are recorded.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-3 122

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-3- Monthly Maintenance (continued)

5-3-1-3- Cleaning the IDS-iSYS D-Sorb pump and level sensor shafts

! This maintenance activity is managed only for systems using DSORB solution.
For other systems, this maintenance activity is not required.

WARNING:
OPENING/CLOSING THE LID
The lid must be opened for this operation.
Always handle the lid carefully during opening and closing.
The lid must always be fully open and the lid support tool must always be
installed.
Take care not to knock the lid during any analyser intervention.
When the lid is not fully open there is a risk of it falling.
During closing, maintain the lid open when removing the lid support tool, to avoid any
risk of accidental falling.

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Remove the cover located at the rear.
• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in the maintenance list.
• Follow the instructions displayed on screen.
• Release the pump body from its shaft by pinching the two clips at either side and gently pulling, ensuring the
tubes remain connected.
• Clean the pump shaft with a cloth soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Return the pump body to its shaft.
• Put the cover back in place.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• To clean the level sensor, use absorbent paper soaked in de-ionised water.
• When maintenance is completed, click on . The date and time it is carried out are recorded.

5-3-1-4- Cleaning the liquid waste level sensor

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

This part of the analyser is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a
potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in this maintenance list.
• Remove the lid from the liquid waste bottle.
• Clean the level sensor with bleach (commercial preparation).
• Rinse the level sensor with de-ionised water.
• Replace the lid.
• When maintenance is completed, click on . The date and time it is carried out are recorded.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-3 123

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-3- Monthly Maintenance (continued)

5-3-1-5- Checking lamp references

• From the main screen, click on the SYSTEM STATUS button.
• Check the intensity values for each of the filters are between 900 and 3100.
• When maintenance is complete, click on the corresponding button and confirm by
clicking ‘YES’.

5-3-1-6- Switch off the instrument

• Switch off the analyser by pressing the switch located on the left-hand side to position “0”.
• Wait for few minutes, then switch the analyser on by pressing the switch to position “1”.
• Click on the corresponding button and confirm by clicking ‘YES’.
• Then perform the start-up procedure.
• Once the start-up procedure is complete, open the reagent compartment
• Remove then reload all the racks in the compartment.
• Should identification fail, identify the reagent(s).

5-3-2- Immunoassay Maintenance

5-3-2-1- Cleaning the IDS-iSYS Wash Solution pump and level sensor shafts
• Remove the cover located on the right-hand side of the analyser.
• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in this maintenance list.
No spindle must rotate/operate while this maintenance is being carried out.
• Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
• Release the IDS-iSYS Wash pump body from its shaft by pinching the two clips at either side and gently
pulling, ensuring the tubes remain connected.
• Clean the shaft of the pump with a cloth soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Return the pump body to its shaft.
• Carry out this procedure for the other pumps.
• To clean the level sensor, use absorbent paper soaked in de-ionised water.
• When maintenance is completed, click . The date and time it is carried out are recorded.
• Replace cover on the right-hand side of the analyser.
• Prime the circuit as follows:

• Select ALL WASHERS-FULL PRIMING, then click on .

The analyser starts up the priming.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-3 124

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-3- Monthly Maintenance (continued)

5-3-2-2- Rinsing of the AP Substrate tubing

• Prepare a 500 mL bottle containing de-ionised water to mimic the AP Substrate.
• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in the maintenance list:

• Replace the AP Substrate bottle with the de-ionised water bottle.

• Click on .
• When the rinsing is complete, the following message displays:

• Remove the de-ionised water bottle and replace the original AP Substrate bottle.
• Click on .
• When maintenance is completed without any error, the date and time are recorded.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-3 125

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions

5-4- Analyser Interventions

5-4-1- Replacement of lamp
(only for systems using a spectrophotometer with an halogen lamp)

WARNING:
RISK OF BURNS
Do not handle the lamp to be replaced immediately after turning off the analyser.
Before handling, allow the lamp to cool for approximately 10 minutes after switching
the analyser off.

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Switch the analyser off and unplug the power cable.
• Remove the bottom partition at the rear of the rinsing well.
• Disconnect the lamp from its supply.
• Unscrew the securing screws located on both sides of the lamp in order to remove the lamp-support unit.
• Remove the old lamp.

WARNING:
RISK OF BURNS

Do not touch the lamp with your fingers.

• Wipe the new lamp with a soft cloth.

! Do not touch the lamp with your fingers.

• Put the new lamp and its base in place, with the guide pin positioned downwards.
• Tighten the securing screws using a screwdriver.
• Connect the lamp to its power supply.
• Replace the partition.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• Switch the analyser back on and start it up.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 126

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• Wait for 10 minutes, then request a measurement of the intensity values by the following pathway:

• From the list of elements, select ABS READER then click on . The analyser carries out a
measurement for each of its filters. When the procedure is finished, exit this menu.
• Click on the SYSTEM STATUS button and check the intensity values for each of the filters are between 900
and 3100.

5-4-2- Replacement of probe

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

The probe is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a potential risk of
infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.
The probe must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations.

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• When the lid of the analyser is equipped with a locking system, the sampling arm moved to its home
position.
• Install the specific protective tray under the probe.
• Unscrew the probe requiring replacement.
• Install the new probe by screwing it in by hand as far as possible to avoid risk of leakage. Take care not to
twist or bend the probe, always handling it by the threaded screw connector.
• Remove the protective tray.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• Adjust the probe reference position (see page 132).
• When the adjustment on the reference position is completed, exit this menu.
• Prime the fluidics circuit as follows:

• Select ARM-Mixed Partial Priming, then click on .

The analyser starts up the fluidics circuit and rinses the sampling needle.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 127

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

5-4-3- Replacement of primary fuses

WARNING:
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

It is essential for the mains connection to be unplugged during replacement of fuses.

The primary fuses are located in the mains plug located on the left-hand side of the analyser.
• Switch the analyser off and unplug the power cable.
• Using a screwdriver, remove the fuse-holder from its housing.

• Replace the faulty fuse, ensuring it is of the same value and the same type (time-delay fuse).
• Return the fuse holder to its housing.
• Switch the analyser back on and perform the start-up procedure.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 128

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

5-4-4- Replacement of secondary fuses

WARNING:
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

It is essential for the mains connection to be unplugged during replacement of fuses.

• Turn off the analyser and unplug the power cable.

• Remove the screws from the secondary fuse protection plate located on the right-hand side of the analyser
and gently prize the plate away using a flat head screwdriver.

• Insert a flat head screwdriver into the fuse-holder and turn anti-clockwise to unscrew.

• Take out the fuse-holder and replace the faulty fuse with one of the same value and the same type (time-
delay fuse).

• Return fuse-holder to its housing and screw firmly into place, taking care not to over-tighten.
• Replace the fuse protection plate.
• Switch the analyser back on again and perform the start-up procedure.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 129

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

5-4-5- Replacement of IDS-iSYS Wash Solution pump (Immunoassay)

• Switch the analyser off.
• Remove the cover from the right-hand side of the analyser.
• Press on the two pins at each side of the pump to be changed and remove the pump body from its shaft.
• Disconnect the pipes from the connectors and plug into the new pump.
• Clean the shaft of the pump with absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Put the pump back in place on its shaft.
• Replace the cover of the analyser.
• Switch the analyser back on again and perform the start-up procedure.
• Carry out partial priming of the washers in order to prime the tubing circuit again.

5-4-6- Replacement of IDS-iSYS System Liquid pump

• Switch the analyser off.
• Remove the cover from the right-hand side of the analyser.
• Press on the two pins at each side of the pump to be changed and remove the pump body from its shaft.
• Disconnect the pipes from the connectors and plug into the new pump.
• Clean the shaft of the pump with absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Put the pump back in place on its shaft.
• Replace the cover of the analyser.
• Switch the analyser back on again and perform the start-up procedure.
• Carry out partial priming of the arm in order to prime the circuit again.

5-4-7- Replacement of liquid waste pump

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

This part of the analyser is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a
potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

• Switch the analyser off.

• Remove the cover from the right-hand side of the analyser.
• Press on the two pins at each side of the pump to be changed and remove the pump body from its shaft.
• Disconnect the pipes from the connectors and plug into the new pump.
• Clean the shaft of the pump with absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Put the pump back in place on its shaft.
• Replace the cover of the analyser.
• Switch the analyser back on again and perform the start-up procedure.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 130

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

5-4-8- Replacement of IDS-iSYS D-Sorb pump

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Remove the cover located at the rear.
• Press on the two pins at each side of the pump to be changed and remove the pump body from its shaft.
• Disconnect the pipes from the connectors and plug into the new pump.
• Clean the shaft of the pump with absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Put the pump back in place on its shaft.
• Replace the cover.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• Carry out partial priming of the arm in order to prime the circuit again.

5-4-9- Removal of the on-board IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube

Perform this operation only at the request of IDS Technical Service & Support personnel.

! Use the special plate provided with the analyser.

! Slightly lift the box to introduce the plate and then put if back before lifting the cube.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 131

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

5-4-10- Adjustment of probe reference position

WARNING:
RISK DUE TO ARM MOVEMENT

This operation must only be performed by a user specially trained by Technical

Services.
The pipetting arm will move with the lid open during this operation.
Contact with the moving pipetting arm may cause severe injuries.

The reference position of the probe must be adjusted each time the needle is replaced, or when requested by
the Technical Services.
This operation is considered as a particular use of the analyser and must be performed only by a user specially
trained to this process.
The different probe positions are defined in relation to this reference position , located to the left of the rinsing
well.
Adjustment must be defined for the three dimensions of the analyser’s functional plane (XYZ adjustments).

It is essential that each position be adjusted for the three dimensions.

! Inappropriate adjustments may decrease the level of analytical performance.

Perform this procedure only at the request of IDS Technical Service & Support personnel.

Depending on whether the locking system is present or not, the procedure is different. The operations to be
performed in each case are described in two different procedures.
If the lid is not equipped with a locking system, refer to the procedure described in chapter 5-4-10-1-
Adjustment procedure for analyser without lid locking system, page 133.
If the lid is equipped with the locking system, the activation key provided with the analyser’s accessories will
be used in this procedure. Refer to the procedure described in chapter 5-4-10-2- Adjustment procedure for
analyser with lid locking system, page 136.

WARNING:
USE OF THE ACTIVATION KEY

The activation key allows a particular use of the analyser, without user’s protection
against the pipetting arm movements. The pipetting arm will move with the lid
opened.
Contact with the moving pipetting arm may cause severe injuries.
The use of the activation key is strictly restricted to this adjustment procedure.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 132

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• In the MAINTENANCE menu, select XYZ ADJUSTMENT:

WARNING:
OPENING/CLOSING THE LID
The lid must be opened for this operation.
Always handle the lid carefully during opening and closing.
The lid must always be fully open and the lid support tool must always be
installed.
Take care not to knock the lid during any analyser intervention.
When the lid is not fully open there is a risk of it falling.
During closing, maintain the lid open when removing the lid support tool, to avoid any
risk of accidental falling.

5-4-10-1- Adjustment procedure for analyser without lid locking system

• Click on .

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 133

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• The probe will be placed over the reference position, located to the left of the rinsing well.
The probe is moved using the arrow buttons on the screen :

• Adjust first the XY positions of the probe, using the corresponding movement arrows (Left, Right, Forward,
Backward). The probe must be centered on the pin of the target.
• Then adjust the Z position: click on the Down (1 mm) button twice.
• Adjust the probe position using repeatedly the Down (0,1 mm) button. The probe must be adjusted just
above the center pin of the target.
• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Gently touch the probe: the probe must slightly resist to the lateral movement.

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

The probe is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a potential risk of
infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

The probe can be moved using Up and Down buttons when the lid is open.
! The Left, Right, Forward, Backward buttons can only move once to each direction when the
lid is open.

• When the adjustment is completed, remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• Click on .

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 134

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• The pipetting arm will move to the rinsing well before returning to the new adjusted position :

• Check the probe position, then remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).
• Click on .
The pipetting arm will move to the rinsing well.
A message confirming completion of the procedure is displayed :

• Click on to validate this message.

A window containing the settings values is displayed :

• Click on .
The main position adjustment window is displayed.
• Click on to exit this menu

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 135

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

Comment:
The button is active in two windows. Clicking on this button will cancel changes in the position
adjustment and the current adjustment will be kept.
To keep the previous adjustment :
• Click on .
The pipetting arm will move to the rinsing well.
A message confirming cancellation of the procedure is displayed :

• Click on to validate this message.

The main position adjustment window is displayed.

5-4-10-2- Adjustment procedure for analyser with lid locking system

• Click on . The message displays:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 136

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• Click on .
The pipetting arm moves to its home position and the lid is unlocked.
The message displays:

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Insert firmly the activation key into place.

WARNING:
USE OF THE ACTIVATION KEY

The activation key allows a particular use of the analyser, without user’s protection
against the pipetting arm movements. The pipetting arm will move with the lid
opened.
Contact with the moving pipetting arm may cause severe injuries.
The use of the activation key is strictly restricted to this adjustment procedure.

• When the activation key is detected, the message displays:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 137

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• Click on .
The pipetting arm moves to the probe reference position, located to the left of the rinsing well.

WARNING:
PIPETTING ARM MOVEMENT

During this operation, the pipetting arm will move with the lid opened.
Contact with the moving pipetting arm may cause severe injuries.

• The probe will be placed over the reference position, located to the left of the rinsing well.
The probe is moved using the arrow buttons on the screen :

• Adjust first the XY positions of the probe, using the corresponding movement arrows (Left, Right, Forward,
Backward). The probe must be centered on the pin of the target.
• Then adjust the Z position: click on the Down (1 mm) button twice.
• Adjust the probe position using repeatedly the Down (0,1 mm) button. The probe must be adjusted just
above the center pin of the target.
• Gently touch the probe: the probe must slightly resist to the lateral movement.

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

The probe is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a potential risk of
infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

• When the adjustment is completed click on .

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 138

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• The pipetting arm will move to the rinsing well before returning to the new adjusted position :

• Check the probe position.

• Click on .
The pipetting arm will move to the rinsing well.
A message confirming completion of the procedure is displayed :

• Click on to validate this message. The message displays:

• Remove the activation key. The removal is detected by the analyser and the message is displayed:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 139

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36). The lid closing is detected by the analyser and a
window containing the settings values is displayed:

• Click on .
The main position adjustment window is displayed.
• Click on to exit this menu.

Comment:
The button is active in two windows. Clicking on this button will cancel changes in the position
adjustment and the current adjustment will be kept.
To keep the previous adjustment :
• Click on .
The pipetting arm will move to the rinsing well.
A message confirming cancellation of the procedure is displayed:

• Click on to validate this message. The message displays:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 140

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• Remove the activation key. The removal is detected by the analyser and the message is displayed:

• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36). The lid closing is detected by the analyser and
the main position adjustment window is displayed.

5-4-11- Unclogging the sampling probe

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

The probe is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a potential risk of
infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.
The probe must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations.

Use only the nylon mandrel provided for this purpose with the analyser.
! Do not use a metallic mandrel that will damage the internal surface of the probe.

• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• If the lid of the analyser is equipped with a locking system, the sampling arm moves to its home position.
• Install the specific protective tray under the probe.
• Unscrew the sampling probe.
• Insert the mandrel into the bottom of the probe, and pass it through the entire length of the probe, until the
probe becomes unblocked.
• Outside of the analyser, verify that the probe is fully unblocked by passing deionized water through the top of
the probe with a syringe:

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

The probe is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a potential risk of
infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.
The probe must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 141

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

• If the probe is properly unblocked, the water will exit the probe in a straight jet and the syringe plunger can
be pushed freely.
• If the syringe plunger must be strongly pushed and if water drips when exiting the probe, repeat this
procedure.
• Then clean the probe with an absorbent paper soaked in alcohol at 70% v/v (ethyl or isopropyl).
• Reassemble the probe by screwing it in by hand as far as possible to avoid risk of leakage.
• Remove the protective tray.
• Remove the lid support tool and close the lid (see page 36).

When the analyser is not in cycle mode:

• Adjust the probe reference position (see page 132 and following).
• Prime the fluidics circuit as follows:

• Select ARM-Mixed Partial Priming, then click on .

The analyser starts up the fluidics circuit and rinses the sampling needle.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 142

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

5-4-12- Intervention in System Configuration menu

! Perform this procedure only at the request of IDS Technical Service & Support personnel.

If a module remains unusable once the error message is released, the faulty element is no longer operational
and the error message will remain. When this fault involves either one of the washers or a particular wavelength
of the spectrophotometer, the relevant element can be temporarily deactivated using the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION menu. This should only be used when following guidance by IDS Technical Service &
Support personnel.
This operation requires a Supervisor level of access.
• In the MAINTENANCE menu, select SYSTEM CONFIGURATION:

The configuration system menu is displayed.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 143

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

Deactivate a washer

• To deactivate a washer, uncheck the relevant box to deselect the washer.

• Then click on .
• When the modification is completed, click on to exit the menu.
• Perform the start-up procedure.

! Washer deselection may impair the Immunoassay analytical throughput.

Deactivate a wavelength

• To deactivate a wavelength, uncheck the relevant box to deselect the wavelength.

• Then click on .
• When the modification is completed, click on to exit the menu.
• Perform the start-up procedure.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 144

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-4- Analyser Interventions (continued)

5-4-13- Repeat an automatic maintenance

Certain maintenance activities are carried out automatically by the system, without user’s intervention.
If a fault prevents the automatic maintenance being carried out in full, an error message is displayed. A
Warning message remains in the WARNING window until a new maintenance is complete without any error.
When this maintenance cannot be carried out automatically by the system, a new maintenance can be
requested by the user.

5-4-13-1- Washer needle cleaning

This automatic maintenance takes place when the system is placed in standby mode.
After cleaning the sampling probe using D-SORB solution, four cuvettes are prepared, each filled with 500 µl of
this solution (injected in two steps). The cuvettes are then transferred to the four washers: the aspiration needle
of the washer is cleaned when aspirating the D-SORB solution. This step is followed by a washing step. This
maintenance takes around 3 minutes et uses 3 ml de solution D-SORB.
• Check that D-SORB and WASH S solutions are present on the system, both with sufficient volumes..
• From the MAINTENANCE menu, select REPEAT AN AUTOMATIC MAINTENANCE, then select:

As soon as the menu option is selected, the maintenance is carried out by the system.
• When maintenance is completed without any error, the date and time are recorded in the journal of events (in
the SYSTEM RECORDS tab).

5-4-13-2- Cleaning the probe

This automatic maintenance takes place when the system is placed in standby mode.
Certain assays performed on the system require a daily cleaning of the sampling probe with the
Immunocleaner solution. This product is supplied in the form of a reagent cartridge and must be installed in
the reagent compartment.
During this maintenance, the probe performs three times the following cycle : pipetting 300 µl of
Immunocleaner solution, waiting for 30 seconds above the rinsing well, rinsing. The final rinsing uses D-Sorb
solution.
• Check that IDS-iSYS D-Sorb and Immunocleaner solutions are present in sufficient quantities on the
analyser.
• From the MAINTENANCE menu, select REPEAT AN AUTOMATIC MAINTENANCE, then select:

As soon as the menu option is selected, the maintenance is carried out by the system.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-4 145

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-5- Analyser Cleaning

5-5- Analyser Cleaning

! Do not use any spray products on the analyser.

The cleaning and decontamination process for the parts of the analyser protected by the lid is described in
5-2- Weekly Maintenance, page 118 and following.
The analyser bodywork can be cleaned with absorbent paper soaked in de-ionised water. If necessary, use a
neutral, phosphate free detergent suitable for medical devices, diluted as recommended by the supplier, to
clean traces on the bodywork.
The external side of the lid can be cleaned with absorbent paper soaked in de-ionised water.

! Do not clean the internal side of the lid.

Decontaminate the bodywork and the lid (internal and external sides) with a disinfectant wipe/solution suitable
for medical devices.
For the internal side of the lid:
• Open the lid and insert the lid support tool (see pages 35 and 36).
• Switch off the analyser.
• Decontaminate the internal side of the lid with a disinfectant wipe/solution suitable for medical devices.

Do not touch the lock spring.

! A slight touch on this spring releases the locking mechanism and prevents the lid closing.
In this case, switch off the analyser and push the lock axis back into its housing.

In case of hazardous material accidental spillage into or onto the analyser, decontaminate with a disinfectant
wipe/solution suitable for medical devices.

The following products cannot be used for cleaning or decontamination of the analyser:
• Strong or weak acids
• Bases
• Pure alcohol
• Solvents (ether, White Spirit, gasoline)
• Ammonia
• Chlorine
• Bleach
• Benzene

! If there is any doubt about using a particular product, contact Technical Services.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-5 146

Software version V 14
 Maintenance
5-5- Analyser Cleaning (continued)

5-5-1- Decontaminating the containers of solid and liquid waste

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

This part of the analyser is in contact with biological samples. There is, therefore, a
potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

Solid waste tray

• Empty and decontaminate the waste tray once emptied with a disinfectant solution suitable for medical
devices.
• Rinse it with water, then decontaminate again with a disinfectant solution suitable for medical devices.
• Dry the tray prior to replacing in its compartment.

Liquid waste container

• Rinse the container with freshly prepared bleach once the liquid waste has been disposed of.
• Then rinse with tap water.
• Add the appropriate volume of bleach prior to reusing the container with the analyser (see Section
Appendices, A-1- Waste Disposal, page A2).

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Maintenance 5-5 147

Software version V 14
SECTION!6:
Problems!&!
Corrective!Action
 Section 6
Problems & Corrective Action 148

6-1- Resolving Errors in Cartridge Check System (CCS) 149

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 148

Software version V 14
 Problems & Corrective Action
6-1- Resolving Errors in Cartridge Check System (CCS)

6-1- Resolving Errors in Cartridge Check System (CCS)

Problem Possible cause & corrective action

CCS1 %CV outside limits 1 - Presence of air bubbles in the sampling fluidic circuit. Check for air bubbles
in the tubing circuit. Carry out a full priming of the arm.
2 - Check for the presence of bubbles in the reagents: there should be none.
3 - Check that the probe is not blocked or bent. Carry out a decontamination
of the probe (see Section 5-1-1-4, page 117), if applicable. If the probe is bent,
replace it and adjust the XYZ reference position (see Section 5-4-2, page 127).
4 - Check for air bubbles on the IDS-iSYS Triggers A and B tubing circuits.
Check for air bubbles in the tubing circuits.
5 - Repeat the CCS1 test.
6 - If the problem persists, contact IDS Service & Support personnel.
CCS2 %CV outside limits 1 - Presence of air bubbles in the sampling fluidic circuit. Check for air bubbles
in the tubing circuit. Carry out a full priming of the arm.
2 - Check for the presence of bubbles in the reagents: there should be none.
3 - Check that the probe is not blocked or bent. Carry out a decontamination
of the probe (see Section 5-1-1-4, page 117), if applicable. If the probe is bent,
replace it and adjust the XYZ reference position (see Section 5-4-2, page 127).
4 - Check for air bubbles in the IDS-iSYS Triggers A and B tubing.
5 - Repeat the CCS2 test.
6 - If the problem persists, contact IDS Service & Support personnel.
CCS3x Value outside limits 1 - Presence of residual IDS-iSYS Wash for the associated washer: carry out a
full priming of all washers.
2 - Check for air bubbles in the IDS-iSYS Triggers A and B tubing.
3 - Check IDS-iSYS Cuvettes and IDS-iSYS Triggers by carrying out a
CCS4 test.
4 - If CCS4 is within the limits, replace the IDS-iSYS Wash Solution in use.
Carry out full priming of washers and repeat CCS3 tests.
5- If CCS4 exceeds the limits, replace the IDS-iSYS Cuvettes and IDS-iSYS
Triggers in use.
5 - If the problem persists, contact IDS Service & Support personnel.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Problems & Corrective Action 6-1 149
Software version V 14
 Problems & Corrective Action
6-1- Resolving Errors in Cartridge Check System (CCS) (continued)

Problem Possible cause & corrective action

CCSB %CV outside limits 1 - The magnetic particles of the CCS cartridge are not correctly mixed:
manually mix the magnetic particles vial by gentle repeated inversion.
2 - Check that the probe is not blocked or bent. Carry out a decontamination
of the probe (see Section 5-1-1-4, page 117), if applicable. If the probe is bent,
replace it and adjust the XYZ reference position (see Section 5-4-2, page 127).
3 - Check for air bubbles in the IDS-iSYS Wash Solution tubing. Carry out a full
priming of all washers.
4 - Repeat the CCSB test.
5 - If the problem persists, contact IDS Service & Support personnel.

CCS1/CCS2 Ratio outside 1 - Presence of air bubbles in the sampling fluidic circuit. Check for air bubbles
limits in the tubing circuit. Carry out a full priming of the arm.
2 - Check for the presence of bubbles in the reagents: there should be none.
3 - Check that the probe is not blocked or bent. Carry out a decontamination
of the probe (see Section 5-1-1-4, page 117, if applicable. If the probe is bent,
replace it and adjust the XYZ reference position (see Section 5-4-2, page 127).
4 - Check for air bubbles in the IDS-iSYS Triggers A and B tubing.
5 - Repeat the CCS1 & 2 tests.
6 - If the problem persists, contact IDS Service & Support personnel.

CCSB / CCS1 (x10) Ratio 1 - Replace the IDS-iSYS Triggers A and B.

outside limits
2 - Adjust the probe XYZ reference position (see 5-4-10- Adjustment of probe
reference position, page 132).
3 - Replace the CCS cartridge.
4 - Repeat the CCS1 and CCSB tests.
5 - If the problem persists, contact IDS Service & Support personnel.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Problems & Corrective Action 6-1 150
Software version V 14
SECTION 7:
System Configuration
 Section 7

System Configuration 151

7-1- Programming the automatic qualification profile! 152

7-2- Creating the reflex tests! 153
7-2-1- Creating a new rule! 154
7-2-2- Launch option of reflex tests! 156
7-2-3- Modifying an existing rule! 157
7-2-4- Importing/exporting rules! 157
7-2-5- Removing a rule! 157
7-3- Configuring the print settings! 158
7-4- Options of validating and transferring the results! 159
7-5- User management! 160
7-6- Updating the analytical configuration! 162

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 151

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-1- Programming the automatic qualification profile

7-1- Programming the automatic qualification profile

The qualification profile can be programmed as part of the automatic start-up of the analyser.
The automatic start-up is programmed in the set-up menu under SYSTEM SETTINGS.

• In the SET-UP menu, select the LOCAL SYSTEM menu:

• In the LOCAL SYSTEM menu, select the STARTING-UP tab:

• Click on the box ‘Activate wake-up’.

• Check the box ‘Run a QC profile on wake-up’.
• The fields for programming the qualification profile are displayed.
• From the drop-down list, select the necessary test and programme the required number of replicates (see
CCS IFU) and click .
• Repeat the operation for each test required.
• Click on .

Provided a valid CCS reagent cartridge is present, along with sufficient levels of ancillary

! reagents, the analyser will automatically perform the relevant priming and QC profile at the
scheduled ‘wake-up’ time.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-1 152

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-2- Creating the reflex tests

7-2- Creating the reflex tests

The reflex tests are automatically scheduled for a given patient when a result previously obtained for one, two
or three tests meets defined conditions.
Depending upon the selected option, tests to be scheduled are either automatically added or added on user’s
request.
The system can thus manage one, two or three conditions related to the assay result of one, two or three tests.
These conditions are defined in rules.
Reflex tests can be created with a Supervisor level of access when the system is not in cycle mode. These
tests can be created or imported from a file.
The existing reflex tests can be displayed by any level of access, even during a run cycle.
Tests to launch when the defined conditions are met must target the same type of sample (serum / plasma,
urine, Other) than the triggering test.
If the same test is requested several times by different reflex tests, this assay is performed once.
Similarly, when an analyte is assayed in several replicates, a single request is programmed for each of the
reflex test associated with that analyte .

• In the SETUP menu, select:

• The table of the reflex tests is displayed:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-2 153

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-2- Creating the reflex tests (continued)

7-2-1- Creating a new rule

• Click on an empty cell of the «Condition 1» column in order to create a new rule of reflex tests:

• Select the target analyte from the dropdown list.

• Then enter the value (in working units) triggering the condition.
• Then select the relation of order between the condition and the programmed value (lower, lower or equal,
higher, higher or equal by clicking the appropriate radio button:

• Click on .
The rule is created with its number in the list and is immediately applied to the references Man, Woman,
Child and Other:

• Two other conditions can be defined as described above by clicking in the relevant column.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-2 154

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-2- Creating the reflex tests (continued)

• The application can be restricted to certain patient categories by clicking in the cell of the Reference column:

• Click on the relevant tick to deselect a reference.

• Then click on .
• Click in the cell of the «Test to launch» column:

The tests of the personal library are displayed.

• Select the additional test(s) to launch by clicking in the relevant box.
• Then click on :

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-2 155

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-2- Creating the reflex tests (continued)

• Proceed in the same way for other rules to be created.

• Click on to exit the menu and save the created rules.

7-2-2- Launch option of reflex tests

Depending upon the selected option, additional tests to perform can be:
- automatically added to the relevant profile,
- added to the profile after accepting the automatic action or by using a specific button in the profile
edition.

Tests are automatically added to the profile.

Tests are added to the profile after user’s indication.

• Tick or untick the launch option of tests according to the desired behavior.
• Exit the menu by clicking on to save the modification.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-2 156

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-2- Creating the reflex tests (continued)

7-2-3- Modifying an existing rule

• Select the desired rule and click in the cell to modify.
• Enter the modification and click on the button in the window.
• Conditions 2 and 3 can be removed. To do this, click in the relevant cell to display the programming window
of condition 2 or condition 3, then click on .
• Exit the menu by clicking on to save the modification.

! Condition 1 cannot be removed.

7-2-4- Importing/exporting rules

The table containing the rules defining the reflex test can be exported. When exporting, the system generates a
specific format file (extension .rfx) that can then be imported into the software interface.

Exporting the rules

• Click on .
• Select the assigned folder and enter the file name.
• Click on SAVE.

Importing the rules

• Click on .
• Select the source file (file format .rfx) by specifying the appropriate pathway and click on OPEN.
• The rules contained in the file are added to the existing rules.
• Exit the menu by clicking on to save the modification.

7-2-5- Removing a rule

An existing rule can be removed.

• Click on the icon of the rule to remove.

• The rule is removed from the table and the numbering of the rules is consequently modified.
• Exit the menu by clicking on to save the modification.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-2 157

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-3- Configuring the print settings

7-3- Configuring the print settings

• In the SET-UP menu, select the LOCAL SYSTEM menu:

• Printing parameters are defined in the LABORATORY tab:

• Use the keyboard to enter the header text.

To insert a line break, use CTRL + ENTER.
• Select the desired printing options by clicking the appropriate radio button.
• Select the printer if necessary.
• Exit the menu by clicking on to save the modifications.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-3 158

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-4- Options of validating and transferring the results

7-4- Options of validating and transferring the results

• In the SET-UP menu, select the LOCAL SYSTEM menu:

• The options of validating and transferring the results are defined in the TRANSFER/VALIDATION OF
RESULTS tab:

• Select the option of result transfer by clicking in the appropriate radio-button:

- As soon as validated: as soon as available, the result is sent to the centralised computer
- After manual validation: all results of patient profile are sent after using the button in
the worklist or in profile edition.
• Select the option of result validation by clicking in the appropriate radio-button:
- All results are validated: as soon as available, the result is validated and sent to the centralised
computer. The completed profile is automatically stored.
- Results without messages are validated: only the results accompanied with the message OK are
validated. button must be used to store the other results and transfer the relevant
patient profiles.
- No results validated: button must be used to store and transfer each patient profile.
• Then select the transfer option(s) of calculated parameters and biochemistry profiles (applicable when a
profile contains both biochemistry and immunology tests).
• Exit the menu by clicking on to save the modifications.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-3 159

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-5- User management

7-5- User management

Access to the application is controlled by access code. Several levels of authorization are managed by the
system, which for users, Supervisor and Operator levels. The upper levels are reserved to Technical Services.
The codes and access levels are declared in the system and can be modified later.
Access to the various menu is dependent on user level. Certain menus can be not accessible for certain levels
or can only be displayed, but cannot be modified.
Adding new users is allowed from the Supervisor level.
Each user is defined by a name and a password. The name and the access code must be unique in the
system.
• In the SET-UP menu, select:

The list of the users defined for the system is displayed:

Declare a new user

• To declare a new user, click on :

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-3 160

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-5- User management (continued)

• Click in the entry field of the name then enter the name using the keyboard (maximal length: 20
alphanumeric characters).
• Click in the entry field of the access code then enter the password sing the keyboard (maximal length:8
alphanumeric characters).

Remember the defined password and its cases (combination of characters in capital and lower
! cases).

• Then select in the list the level of access.

• Click on to record the new user.

Modify a user
• Select the user to modified then click on .
• Enter the relevant modification(s) then click on .

Remove a user
• Select the user to remove then click on .
• The user is removed from the list.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-3 161

Software version V14
 System Configuration
7-6- Updating the analytical configuration

7-6- Updating the analytical configuration

When the analytical configurations must be updated, a "Master Database & Update Tool" CD is provided by
IDS.
The update is done from the user interface.
• Insert the CD provided by IDS in the CD drive.
• In the FILE menu, select:

• Open the file «config.acu» from the CD by indicating the relevant pathway.
• When the update starts, a window is displayed with the list of the modified analytes and with the result of
each modification:

In case of error message or failure when updating one or several analytes, contact IDS
! Technical Services.

• Click on . During the software initialisation, the following message is displayed:

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 System Configuration 7-3 162

Software version V14
Appendices
 Appendices
Appendices A1

A-1 Waste Disposal A2

A-2 Decontaminating the Analyser A3
Cleaning/Decontaminating Declaration A4
A-3 Disposal Of the Analyser A5
A-4 IDS-iSYS Cuvettes A6
A4-1 List of symbols used on the IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube A6
A4-2 Storage of the IDS-iSYS Cuvette cubes A6
A-5 Sample barcode symbology managed by the system A7
A-6- Analyser long stoppage period A8
A6-1-Less than 14 days A8
A6-2-Between 15 and 30 days A 10
A6-3-Analyser start up after a long stoppage period A 13

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 A1

Software version V 14
 Appendices
A-1- Waste Disposal

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

Waste which contains, or which has been in contact with, biological specimens must
be considered to be a potential risk of infection.
Always wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.
Waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations.

Liquid waste
Liquid waste is collected in a 10 liters container.
• Before installing the liquid waste container container, put 250 mL of commercial bleach ready-to-use (2,6%
of active Chloride) into the empty container.
Liquid waste should be considered potentially infectious and must, therefore, be disposed of in accordance
with current local regulations.
Except when an automated system of liquid waste treatment is used, liquid waste must be processed prior to
disposal in order to eliminate a biological risk. This procedure must be carried out outside of the analyser:
• When the container is full, remove the plunger and remove the container from the analyser.
• Add 500 mL of concentrated bleach (9,6% of active Chloride).
• Leave on overnight.
• Eliminate the processed waste in accordance with current local procedures.

! This process does not eliminate chemical risk.

! Do not use bleach in tablet form.

Solid waste
• Probes.
• IDS-iSYS Cuvettes.

Solid waste should be considered potentially infectious and must, therefore, be disposed of in accordance with
current local regulations.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-1 A2

Software version V 14
 Appendices
A-2- Decontaminating the Analyser

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

These parts of the analyser are in contact with biological samples.

There is, therefore, a potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves for all handling procedures.

The analyser must be decontaminated after carrying out the regular maintenance procedures described in
Section 5 of this user manual. It is essential that decontamination is carried out:
• Prior to any intervention by the Technical Services & Support personnel.
• Prior to any transportation of the system.

A cleaning/decontaminating declaration must be completed by the user.

The declaration is printed on the following page and should be duplicated and, once completed, attached to
the analyser in a prominent position.
It is essential for this declaration to accompany the analyser during any transportation (e.g. return to factory).
Cleaning/decontamination process:
• Decontaminate the probe with a wipe soaked in a decontaminating solution suitable for medical devices.
• Decontaminate the sample tray and reagent compartment with a wipe soaked in a decontaminating solution
suitable for medical devices.
• Decontaminate the rinsing well and the liquid waste tubing by pouring bleach (commercial preparation) into
the drainage hole in the rinsing well.
• Empty the solid waste tray and liquid waste container.
• Decontaminate the solid waste tray with a wipe soaked in a decontaminating solution suitable for medical
devices.
• Decontaminate the bodywork, the keyboard and the keys of the computer with a wipe soaked in a
decontaminating solution suitable for medical devices.

! Do not use any spray products on the analyser.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-2 A3

Software version V 14
 Appendices
Cleaning/Decontaminating Declaration

NAME OF ANALYSER:!

SERIAL NUMBER:

LABORATORY!

NAME

ADDRESS

This analyser was cleaned and decontaminated on ........../........../..........

I declare that I have carried out all stages of cleaning and disinfecting described in the user manual.

NAME

Position (optional)

SIGNATURE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! LABORATORY SEAL

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-2 A4

Software version V 14
 Appendices
A-3- Disposal Of The Analyser

Since 13/08/2005, the disposal of electrical and electronic waste has been governed by Directive 2002/96/
E.C. of 27 January 2003, revised by Directive 2012/19/UE of 4th July 2012.
This Regulation is applied in each European country. The OWNER of the equipment must contact its VENDOR
in order to obtain information about current national and local laws.
 
In case where the equipment is removed from the OWNER’s site, the OWNER must return the device
decontaminated, and must apply the disinfection procedure described in Appendix 2.
Furthermore, containers that have been in contact with solid waste must be disinfected. Solid and liquid waste,
as well as liquid waste tubing must be disposed of according to the current local laws.
 
In the event of resale to a third party, the first OWNER must notify the VENDOR of the name and address of the
new OWNER of the device in order to guarantee traceability of the equipment and for its subsequent disposal,
and must inform the new OWNER that the equipment must be disposed of according to the current local laws.
 
Failing this, the first OWNER will have to pay all the costs and all the fines the government may enforce upon
the SUPPLIER (the VENDOR) for breach of its obligation to ensure traceability of the disposal of its equipment
in accordance with regulations.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-3 A5

Software version V 14
 Appendices
A-4- IDS-iSYS Cuvettes
A4-1- List of symbols used on the IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube

Manufacturer.

In vitro diagnostic medical device.

Store/hold the box this way up.

Keep dry.

Fragile

Single use.

Catalogue number.

Lot number.

Expiry date.

Storage temperature.

Quantity.

A4-2- Storage of the IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube

• Always store IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube in their original packaging.

• Never store IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube outside the original packaging.
• Always store the IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube in the upright position as indicated by the arrows on the box.
• Keep IDS-iSYS Cuvettes cube in a clean and dry place, sheltered from dust.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-4 A6

Software version V 14
 Appendices
A-5- Sample barcode symbology managed by the system

! It is recommended to use a symbology containing a check character.

Calibrators and controls are automatically identified using a 12 digit barcode.

! When possible, avoid 12 digit identification for samples.

Barcode symbology recognized by the reader

• Code 128
• Code 39
• Codabar
• EAN/UPC
• Interleaved 2 of 5

Reader programming possibilities

Depending of the barcode symbology, the following elements can be programmed.
This programming can be done on demand by Technical Service.

Min number Max number

Check digit
of characters of characters
Interleaved 2 of 5 yes yes yes

Code 128 no yes yes

Code 39 yes yes yes

Codabar no yes yes

EAN/UPC yes no no

Recommendations
• The barcode should contain at least 5 digits for the removable rack configuration (sample tubes identified by
the barcode reader integrated into the sample compartment) or at least 4 digits (except if Interleaved 2of 5)
for the fixed tray configuration (sample tubes identified by the barcode reader in the front of the analyser).
• The barcode must not contain more than 32 digits. The character «%» must not be used .
• The height of the barcode should not be less than 10 mm
• The barcode symbol should be placed at the center of the area between 20 mm above the bottom of the
tube and 14 mm below the top of the tube, excluding the cap.
• The label should be placed with the bars perpendicular to the axis of the tube.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-5 A7

Software version V 14
 Appendices
A-6- Analyser long stoppage period
When the analyser has been inactive for more than 2 days, a specific procedure for stopping the analyser must
be applied. The procedure will depend on the duration of the stoppage.
• Less than 14 days: the analyser will be placed in standby mode, with a daily automatic wake-up. A startup
procedure will be automatically performed every day. Ancillary reagents will be kept on-board, except AP
Substrate.
• Between 15 and 30 days: the analyser will be switched off completely, after a decontamination of the
TRIGGERS A and B fluidic circuits.
If the analyser must be stopped for a period longer than one month, contact the Technical Services.

TRIGGER A and TRIGGER B solutions must not be kept on-board during long periods of

! inactivity (more than two weeks).

TRIGGER B solution may damage the fluidic circuit pump and may have an impact on CCS
results.

A6-1-Less than 14 days

The analyser is placed in standby mode, with a daily automatic wake-up. Ancillary reagents are kept on-board,
except AP Substrate. A startup procedure is automatically performed every day.
For systems using AP Substrate, a cleaning procedure of the AP Substrate fluidic circuit must be carried out.
The AP Substrate tubing rising maintenance, included in the monthly maintenance, will be used to carry out
this procedure.

Each startup procedure will use the following products:

Description Quantity

IDS-iSYS Trigger A 4.8 mL

IDS-iSYS Trigger B 4.8 mL

IDS-iSYS SYST L 3.4 mL

IDS-iSYS WASH S 35 mL

IDS-iSYS Cuvettes 28 cuvettes

As the solid waste will be full after 14 days, the automatic startup will no longer be performed.

! When the spectrophotometer is deactivated, the solid waste will be full after 3 days and the
automatic startup will no longer be performed.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-6 A8

Software version V 14
 Appendices
For systems using DSORB solution, a maintenance procedure for the four washers will take place
automatically during the SHUT DOWN procedure. Each shutdown procedure will use the following products:

Description Quantity

IDS-iSYS WASH S 24 mL

IDS-iSYS D-SORB 3 mL

IDS-iSYS Cuvettes 4 cuvettes

• Remove all samples.

• Remove reagent racks and store in accordance with IFU recommendations.
• Carry out daily maintenance, then if necessary, weekly and monthly maintenance.
• For systems using AP Substrate, from the MONTHLY MAINTENANCE menu, perform the « Rinsing of the AP
Substrate tubing» maintenance twice to rinse the fluidic circuit following the below steps:
• Replace the AP Substrate bottle by a 500 mL bottle containing de-ionised water to mimic the AP
Substrate.
• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in the maintenance list.

• Click on .When the first step is completed, a message is displayed.

• Keep the distilled water bottle in the AP Substrate position, continue the maintenance by clicking on
.
• Repeat this procedure a second time.
• After the two rinsing procedures are completed, perform the « Rinsing of the AP Substrate tubing»
maintenance for a third time to compete the rinse and to empty the fluidic circuit:
• Keep the distilled water bottle in the AP Substrate position.

• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in the maintenance list.

• Click on .When the first step is completed, a message is displayed.

• Replace the bottle containing distilled water with an empty bottle. Continue the maintenance by
clicking on .
• Empty the liquid waste
• Empty the solid waste.
• Waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations (see APPENDIX I: Waste disposal,
page A2).

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

Waste which contains, or has been in contact with, biological specimens must be
considered to pose a potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves when handling waste.
The waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations.

• Click on .
• Click on the liquid waste icon.
Then validate the message confirming the liquid waste emptying.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-6 A9

Software version V 14
 Appendices
• Click on the solid waste icon.
Then validate the message confirming the solid waste emptying.
• Check the current volume of each ancillary reagent is sufficient to cover the stoppage period.
If necessary, install a new ancillary reagent.
• Exit the menu.
• In SETUP menu, select the SETTINGS LOCAL SYSTEM menu:

• Program a daily automatic wake-up, without exception days .

• Program a daily automatic shut down, without exception days . One hour time delay between wake-up and
shut-down is required.
• If necessary, unselect the automatic QC profile option.
• Click on to save the modification.
• From the Session menu, select SHUT DOWN to put the analyser into standby mode.

! For systems using DSORB solution, a maintenance procedure for the four washers will take
place automatically during the SHUT DOWN procedure.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-6 A 10

Software version V 14
 Appendices
A6-2-Between 15 and 30 days
The analyser can be completely stopped after a decontamination of the IDS-iSYS TRIGGER B fluidic circuit
followed by the emptying of the two TRIGGER and of the D-SORB fluidic circuits. The TRIGGER tubing
cleaning maintenance, included in the weekly maintenance, will be used to carry out this procedure.
• Remove all samples.
• Remove reagent racks and store in accordance with IFU recommendations.
• Carry out daily maintenance.
• Carry out the general steps of the weekly maintenance.
• Perform the «Rinsing of the Trigger A and Trigger B fluid lines» maintenance a first time for rinsing the fluidic
circuits:
• Replace the two Trigger bottles by two 250 mL bottles containing distilled water.
• When the first step of the maintenance is completed, continue the maintenance with the two bottles
containing distilled water.
• When the rinsing is over, perform the «Rinsing of the Trigger A and Trigger B fluid lines» maintenance a
second time for decontamination of the fluidic circuits:
• Keep the distilled water bottle in the TRIGGER A position. Install the TRIGGER A bottle at the
TRIGGER B position.
• When the first step of the maintenance is completed, continue the maintenance with the same bottles
installed.
• When the decontamination is over, perform the «Rinsing of the Trigger A and Trigger B fluid lines»
maintenance a third time for rinsing and emptying the fluidic circuits:
• Replace the two Trigger bottles by two 250 mL bottles containing distilled water.
• When the first step of the maintenance is completed, replace the two bottles containing distilled water
with empty bottles. Continue the maintenance.
• Carry out the general steps of the monthly maintenance.
• For systems using AP Substrate, perform the « Rinsing of the AP Substrate tubing» maintenance twice to
rinse the fluidic circuit following the below steps:
• Replace the AP Substrate bottle by a 500 mL bottle containing de-ionised water to mimic the AP
Substrate.
• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in the maintenance list.

• Click on .When the first step is completed, a message is displayed.

• Keep the distilled water bottle in the AP Substrate position, continue the maintenance by clicking on
.
• Repeat this procedure a second time.
• After the two rinsing procedures are completed, perform the « Rinsing of the AP Substrate tubing»
maintenance for a third time to complete the rinse and to empty the fluidic circuit:
• Keep the distilled water bottle in the AP Substrate position.

• Click on the corresponding button in front of this item in the maintenance list.

• Click on .When the first step is completed, a message is displayed.

• Replace the bottle containing distilled water with an empty bottle. Continue the maintenance by
clicking on .
• Remove the bottle in the AP Substrate position.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-6 A 11

Software version V 14
 Appendices
• For rinsing the D-SORB fluidic circuit, replace the D-SORB bottle with a bottle containing de-ionised water.
• Identify the position by using the barcode label of the D-SORB bottle that just has been removed from the
system.
• Request three times the priming SPECIFIC DECONTAMINATING SOLUTION, from the menu

• For emptying the D-SORB fluidic circuit, remove the D-SORB level sensor from the bottle and wipe it.
• Invert the D-SORB level sensor and keep it in the air.
• Identify the position by using the barcode label of the D-SORB bottle that just has been removed from the
system.
• Request three times the priming SPECIFIC DECONTAMINATING SOLUTION, from the menu

• Empty the liquid waste

• Empty the solid waste.
• Waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations (see APPENDIX I: Waste disposal,
page A2).

WARNING:
RISK OF BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

Waste which contains, or has been in contact with, biological specimens must be
considered to pose a potential risk of infection.
Wear disposable gloves when handling waste.
The waste must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations.

• Click on .
• Click on the liquid waste icon.
Then validate the message confirming the liquid waste emptying.
• Click on the solid waste icon.
Then validate the message confirming the solid waste emptying.
• Check the current volume of each ancillary reagent is adequate with the stop period.
• From the File menu, click on EXIT, the software will close.
• Then turn off the computer following the procedure for shutting down WINDOWS.
• Finally, press the switch located on the left-hand side of the analyser into position ‘0’.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-6 A 12

Software version V 14
 Appendices
A6-3-Analyser start up after a long stoppage period
• Perform the initial start up.
• Install new ancillary reagents

Description

IDS-iSYS Trigger A

IDS-iSYS Trigger B

IDS-iSYS SYST L

IDS-iSYS WASH S

IDS-iSYS D-SORB

• For systems using AP Substrate, install a new bottle of AP Substrate in its corresponding position.
• Once the new bottles are installed, a message proposing an automatic priming is displayed:

• Click on to confirm the priming of the product(s).

The analyser starts the priming sequence.
• Request twice ALL SYSTEM-FULL PRIMING from the menu:

• Install a CCS reagent cartridge.

• Then perform the qualification profile.

Wait for 40 minutes after installing CCS reagent cartridge before starting qualification profile, as

! the CCS reagent cartridge temperature must be allowed to equilibrate.

IDS-iSYS User Manual - Revision M1 Appendix A-6 A 13

Software version V 14
Connection
Protocol

For further assistance,

please contact IDS Technical Support:
Tel: 0191 519 6153
Fax: 0191 519 0760
Email: [email protected]

IDS France , 42, rue Stéphane Mazeau, 21320 POUILLY-EN-AUXOIS, FRANCE

IDS Ltd 10 Didcot Way, Boldon Business Park,

Boldon, Tyne and Wear, NE35 9PD
Tel: 0191 519 0660
 Connection Protocol

Contents 1

1- Versions of ASTM Protocol 3

2- ASTM Compatible Version 4

2-1- General information 4

2-2- The Header Block 6
2-3- The Patient Block 7
2-4-The Test Order Block 9
2-5- The Result Block 12
2-6- The Request Information Block 14
2-7- The Message Terminator Block 16
2-8- Line of Communication Line 17
2-8-1-Equipment configuration 17
2-8-2-Change to connection setup 17

3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 19

3-1- General information 19
3-2- The Header Block 21
3-3- The Patient Block 22
3-4- The Test Order Block 24
3-5- The Result Block 27
3-6- The Comment Block 29
3-7- The Manufacturer Information Block 30
3-8- The Request Information Block 32
3-9- The Message Terminator Block 34
3-10- Line of Communication Line 35
3-10-1-Equipment configuration 35
3-10-2-Change to connection setup 35
3-10-3-Transferring quality control results 37

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 1

Software version V 14
 Connection Protocol

Contents (continued)

4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 38

4-1- General information 38
4-2- The Header Block 40
4-3- The Patient Block 41
4-4- The Test Order Block 43
4-5- The Result Block 46
4-6- The Comment Block 48
4-7- The Manufacturer Information Block 49
4-8- The Request Information Block 51
4-9- The Message Terminator Block 53
4-10- Line of Communication Line 54
4-10-1-Equipment configuration 54
4-10-2-Change to connection setup 54
4-10-3-Transferring quality control results 56

5- Examples of Data Transfer 57

6- Examples of Data Transfer 58

6-1- Data transferred by the LIS 57
6-2- Data transferred to the LIS with ASTM Compatible Version 61
6-3- Data transferred to the LIS with ASTM Compatible V2 Version 62
6-3- Data transferred to the LIS with ASTM Compatible V3 Version 65

7- Important comments 67

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2

Software version V 14
 1- Versions of ASTM Protocol
The low level connection protocol uses the standard ASTM E 1381-95 “Standard Specification for Low-Level
protocol to transfer messages between clinical laboratory Instruments and computer systems” and the high
level connection protocol uses the standard ASTM E1394-91 “Standard Specification for transferring
information between clinical instruments and computer systems”.
Three versions are available in the software and can be selected from the IDS-iSYS interface:

The ASTM Compatible version is the original connection protocol version, existing in the IDS-iSYS software
versions prior to V10.00.

The ASTM Compatible V2 version offers additional functionalities for the transfers to the LIS:
• transfer of the traceability associated with a result,
• transfer of messages associated with a result in a Comment block,
• transfer of quality control results (if the option is selected).
The ASTM Compatible V3 version offers, in addition to the features of ASTM Compatible V2 version:
• transfer of the operator identifiers,
• transfer of the traceability associated with a result including information about AP Substrate and
pretreatment washer,
• results are resent when a clot is detected on a sample,
• transfer ofTanner stage.

This document describes the structure and construction of ASTM messages used in each version of the
connection protocol.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 1- Versions of ASTM Protocol 3

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-1- General information

The ASTM protocol allows an ASTM message to be sent.

The ASTM Compatible version uses the sections defined as follows:
• The Header block: this block is the first one found in an ASTM frame, it defines the characteristics of the
messages as well as the characters separating the fields and components which will be used
• The Patient block: this block contains all the information about the patient such as his or her last name, first
name, PID, etc
• The Test Order block: this block defines a test, so it contains the data relating to a test carried out on one or
several analytes. This block is always preceded by a patient block
• The Result block: this block contains the result of one analyte and one alone. It is always preceded by a Test
Order block or by another Result block. If several results are sent through for one test, there will then be
several Result blocks following a Test Order block (typically if a test has been carried out on several analytes,
the result of each of these will be provided in one single message but in several Result blocks)
• The Request Information block: This block allows information to be requested in both directions Analyser to
LIS and vice versa. Results or information can be requested about a patient
• The Message Terminator block: This block indicates that the message is ended

The ASTM message has a hierarchical structure, each block from the lower level refers to the block from the
level immediately above, except for the comments blocks.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 4

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-1- General information (continued)

The structure of the ASTM message is the following for this version of protocol:

Header
Patient 1
Order 1
Result 1
…….
Result n
……..
Order n
Result 1
…….
Result 2
Message Terminator

Example of an ASTM message:

H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|2|20111124135800
P|1||20105863||BONTEMPS^Robert||19500226|M|||||DUPONT|||||Comment||||||||||||||
Radiology
O|1|01^7148345||^^^25OHD|R||||||A||||S||||||||||O
R|1|^^^25OHD|25,2|ng/mL|10,0 to 100,0|N||F||||20111124133726|IDS-iSYS
B300B0378|
L|1|N

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 5

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-2- The Header Block

H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|2|20111124135800
This block is the first in the message, and is the one which defines its characteristics.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type H Fixed value H to indicate a Header block.
Delimiters Definition |\^_ Definitions of the delimiters that will be used in the
message. These are the 4 characters which follow
the H, with the following being initialized:
• The field delimiter ( I ) which separates the various
fields.
• The repeat delimiter ( \ ) which separates a
repetition in a field.
• The component delimiter ( ^ ) which separates
the various components of the field.
• The escape delimiter ( _ ) which indicates an
escape sequence for dealing with special
characters.
N.B. The record delimiter is fixed and is always the
character ASCII 13 (carriage return).
Message Control ID Not used.
Access Password Not used.
Sender Name or ID IDS-iSYS B300B0378 Name or identifier of the issuer:
•Not used in the direction LIS => analyser.
•Fixed at IDS-iSYS + Serial number in the direction
device to LIS.
Sender Street Address Not used.
Reserved Field
Sender Telephone Number Not used.
Characteristics of Sender Not used.
Receiver ID Not used.
Comment or Special Not used.
Instruction

Processing ID P Type of message fixed at P for Production.

Version No. 2 Version of the protocol, always equal to 2 (in the
direction analyser => LIS).
Date and Time of Message 20111124135800 Date of message in the format
YYYYMMDDHHmmss.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 6

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-3- The Patient Block

P|1||20105863||BONTEMPS^Robert||19500226|M|||||DUPONT|||||Comment||||||||||||||
Radiology
This block represents the information relating to a patient.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type P Fixed value P to indicate a Patient block.
Sequence Number 1 Number of the Patient block in the message starts
at 1 and is increased for each block in the
message.
Practice Assigned Patient ID Not used.
Laboratory Assigned Patient 20105863 PID.
ID

Patient ID # Not used.

Patient Name BONTEMPS^Robert Field consisting of 5 components last name, first
name, initials, suffix and title.
Only the first 2 fields are used.
Mother’s Maiden Name Not used.
Birth Date 19500226 Date of birth in format YYYYMMDD.
Patient Sex M Reference of patient values:
• M for Man.
• F for Woman.
• E for Child.
• U for others.

In the direction LIS=>IDS-iSYS:

•M for Man.
•F for Woman.
•U for Child.
•U for others.
Patient Race Not used.
Patient Address Not used.
Reserved Field Not used.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 7

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-3- The Patient Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Patient Telephone Number Not used.

Attending Physician ID DUPONT Name of doctor associated with profile.

Special Field 1 Not used.

Special Field 2 Not used.

Patient Height Not used.

Patient Weight Not used.

Patient Known or Suspected Comment Comment associated with profile.

Diagnosis
Patient Active Medication Not used.

Patient Diet Not used.

Practice Field 1 Not used.

Practice Field 2 Not used.

Admission and Discharge Not used.

Dates
Admission Status Not used.

Location Not used.

Nature of Alternative Not used.

Diagnostic Code
Alternative Diagnostic Code Not used.

Patient Religion Not used.

Marital Status Not used.

Isolation Status Not used.

Language Not used.

Hospital Service Radiology Department associated with the profile.

Hospital Institution Not used.

Dosage Category Not used.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 8

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-4- The Order Block

O|1|01^7148345||^^^25OHD|R||||||A||||S||||||||||O
This block represents the information about one or several test requests for a patient.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID O Fixed value O for indicating an Order block.

Sequence Number 1 Number of the order within the Patient block starts
at 1 and is increased for each Order block in the
message.
Container and Specimen ID 01^7148345 This field consists of 2 components:
• The type of container used for the sample
(2 digits).
• 01 PT_11_4.5 mL.
• 02 PT_13_6 mL.
• 03 ST_13_5 mL H.
• 05 Cup 500 µL.
• 06 Cup 2 mL.
• 07 PT_16_10 ml.
• 08 to 17 for configurable containers.
PT for Primary Tube; ST for Secondary Tube
For correct functioning of the apparatus, it is
important to allocate the correct type of container
used for the sample.
If this component is null, the default container type
defined for the tray will be used.
• The SID of the profile concerned by the request.
Instrument Specimen ID Not used.

Universal Test ID ^^^25OHD This ASTM field consists of 4 components:

• Universal test ID.
• Universal test ID Name.
• Universal test ID Type.
• Manufacturer’s Code.

Only the last component is used and will be

entered with the unique IDS-iSYS identifier of the
analyte.
In one single order it is possible to specify several
tests by adding a repeat delimiter and by then
adding one or several UTI thus obtaining a chain of
the type ^^^25OHD\^^^BAP.
Multiple requests of the same test can also be made:
^^^25OHD\^^^25OHD

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 9

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-4- The Order Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Priority R This field may contain the values:
• S = STAT.
• A = ASAP.
• R = Routine.
• C = Callback.
• P = Preoperative.
For the device, only S has any influence, the
passage of the associated profile into Urgent, and
the other values are ignored.
Requested/Ordered Not used.
Date and Time
Specimen Collection Not used.
Date and Time
Collection End Time Not used.

Collection Volume Not used.

Collector ID Not used.

Action Code A Action to be carried out on the block test or tests.

This field may contain the values:
• A for Add.
• C for Cancel.
• N for New.
• P for Pending.
• Q for QC.
For the device, A and N are managed in the same
way (new request or new rerun), C (cancellation of
a request) can be managed if the test is not in
progress. P and Q are not managed.
Danger Code Not used.

Relevant Clinical Information Not used.

Date and Time Not used.

Specimen Received

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 10

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-4- The Order Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Specimen Descriptor S This field consists of two sections:
• The sample type which can take for the IDS-
iSYS the following values:
• U = Urine.
• S = Serum.
• O = Other.
• The sample source (place where the sample
was taken) is not used.

Ordering Physician Doctor

Physician Telephone Not used.
Number
User Field 1 Not used.

User Field 2 Not used.

Laboratory Field 1 Not used.

Laboratory Field 2 Not used.

Date and Time Result Not used.

Reported or Last Modified
Instrument Charge to Not used.
Computer System
Instrument Section ID Not used.

Report Type O This field may take the values:

• O = Order.
• C = Correction.
• P = Preliminary results.
• F = Final results.
• X = Cancel.
• I = Instrument pending (in response to a
request).
• Y = No order on record for this test
(in response to a request).
• Z = No record for this patient
(in response to a request).
• Q = Response to a request.
In the device, C is managed when a clot is
detected on a sample (see page 67).
Reserved Field Not used.
Location or Ward of Not used.
Specimen Collection
Nosocomial Infection Flag Not used.
Specimen Service Not used.

Specimen Institution Not used.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 11

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-5- The Result Block

R|1|^^^25OHD|25,2|ng/mL|10,0 to 100,0|N||F||||20111124133726|IDS-iSYS B300B0378|

This block represents the information sent through by the IDS-iSYS to the LIS after a test has been carried out
for a patient.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID R Fixed value R for indicating a Result block.
Sequence Number 1 The number of the result within the Patient block
begins at 1 and is increased for each Result block
in the message.
Universal Test ID ^^^25OHD This ASTM field consists of 4 components:
• Universal test ID.
• Universal test ID name.
• Universal test ID type.
• Manufacturer’s code.
Only the last component is used and will be
provided with information with the unique IDS-
iSYS identifier of the analyte.
Data or Measurement Value 25,2 The value in the form of ASCII chain.
Results which cannot be calculated are sent in the
format * * * * * . Each character * is separated by a
space.If the value is outside the measuring range,
is transmitted in this field:
• * * * * * when the result is below the measuring
range
• * * * * * when the result is above the measuring
range
(For 25OHD: <5 or >140)
Units ng/mL Blocks used
Reference Range 10,0 to 100,0 Normal reference values used for the patient sent
through in the form of an ASCII chain.
Result abnormal Flags N This field may take the values:
• L = Below low normal.
• H = Above high normal.
• LL = Below alarm low.
• HH = Above alarm high.
• < of absolute low (Field of measurement).
• > of absolute high (Field of measurement).
• N = Normal.
• A = Abnormal.
• U = Significant change Up.
• D = Significant change Down.
• B = Better.
• W = Worse.
Only A and N are managed by IDS-iSYS.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 12

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-5- The Result Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Nature of Abnormality Testing S This field forces S or A for the IDS-iSYS can take
the values:
• A = Age.
• S = Sex.
• R = Race.
And is able to provide an indication about the
bases on which the values of normality were
determined.
Result Status F This field forces to F or P (replicate) on the IDS-
iSYS can take the following values:
•C = Correction.
•P = Preliminary results.
•F = Final results.
•X = Request not honored.
•I = Results pending.
•S = Partial results.
Date of change in Instrument Not used.
Normative Values
Operator ID Not used.
Date and Time Test Started Not used.
Date and Time Test 20111124133726 Date and time of result of test on the GUI.
Completed
Instrument Identification IDS-iSYS B300B0378 Name of device + Serial number.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 13

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-6- The Request Information Block

Q|1|^7148344||ALL||||||||O
This block represents a request for information whose origin now can only be the IDS-iSYS.
This request will be used by the IDS-iSYS after discovering a tube for a patient whose profile is
known on the work list in order to request the tests to be carried out on this tube.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID  Q Fixed value Q to indicate a Request Information block.

Sequence Number 1 The request number starts at 1 and is increased for

each request block in the message.

Starting Range ID Number ^7148344 This field consists of 3 elements; only the first 2 are
used by the IDS-iSYS in order to specify the PID
(optional) and the SID (obligatory) allowing the profile
quoted to be identified.

Ending Range ID Number Not used

Universal Test ID ALL This field can either indicate 1 particular test (in the
identifier via its ID cf Test Order block) or request all
the tests via the code ALL.
Nature of request Time Not used in the direction IDS-iSYS=>LIS.
Limit
Useful if LIS => IDS-iSYS with the value R to say that
the date to be taken into account in the event of filter
is the date of the test results and the date of arrival of
the profile (code S).

Beginning request Results Not used

Date and Time Useful in the direction LIS=>IDS-iSYS.
Ending request Results Not used
Date and Time Useful in the direction LIS=>IDS-iSYS.
Requesting Physician Not used
Name
Requesting Physician Not used
Telephone Number
User Field 1 Not used

User Field 2 Not used

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 14

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-6- The Request Information Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Request Information O Potential values:
Status Code
• C
• P
• F
• X
• I
• S
• M
• R
• A
• N
• O
• D
Only the values O and A are managed in the
direction IDS-iSYS to LIS.
A is used when the LIS does not respond to a
request. In such cases, the request is cancelled
(this field takes the value A). The request is
transmitted 3 times, after which the transmission is
aborted.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 15

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-7- The Message Terminator Block

L|1|N
This block is used in order to indicate the end of an ASTM block. It consists of the following fields:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID L Fixed value L for indicating a Terminator block.
Sequence Number 1 Always at 1 as there is only one sequence per
message.
Termination code N This code designates of end of the message with
the following values, depending on the situation:
• N = Normal.
• T = Abandon issuer.
• R = Abandon receiver.
• E = Unknown Error.
• Q = Error in last request.
• I = No Information available for last query.
• F = Last request for information processed. of
comment.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 16

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-8- Line of Communication

2-8-1-Equipment configuration
Communication with the centralized computer system is connected to the PC associated with the analyser and
can be made by:
• RS232C link. DB9 standard pinouts.
• TCP/IP link. Ethernet cable (RJ45,8 pins)

2-8-2- Change to connection setup

The connection set-up for the interface can be found under SET-UP/SETTINGS/LOCAL SYSTEM:

• With RS232C selected:

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 17

Software version V 14
 2- ASTM Compatible Version
2-8- Line of Communication (continued)

• With TCP/IP selected:

• Configurable options:

The sample container is set with the type sent in the field
«Container and Specimen ID» (see Order Block, page 9).
The user can modify this container type until the sample is
processed by the analyser (blue colour code).

The sample container sent by the LIS is ignored and is set

with the container type defined for the removable rack or for
the fixed tray.
The user can modify this container type until the sample is
processed by the analyser (blue colour code).

• Configurable options (continued):

Active for the option «Clot Detection»

When a clot is detected in a sample, results from this
sample’s profile that have already been transferred to the
LIS will be resent (see 7- Important notes, page 67).

Active for the option «Clot Detection»

Results that have already been transferred to the LIS are
not resent when a clot is detected in a sample.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 2- ASTM Compatible Version 18

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-1- General information

The ASTM Compatible V2 version uses the sections defined as follows:

• The Header block: this block is the first one found in an ASTM frame, it defines the characteristics of the
messages as well as the characters separating the fields and components which will be used
• The Patient block: this block contains all the information about the patient such as his or her last name, first
name, PID, etc, and, in case of control transfer, the name of the control.
• The Test Order block: this block defines a test, so it contains the data relating to a test carried out on one or
several analytes. This block is always preceded by a patient block
• The Result block: this block contains the result of one analyte and one alone. It is always preceded by a Test
Order block or by another Result block. If several results are sent through for one test, there will then be
several Result blocks following a Test Order block (typically if a test has been carried out on several analytes,
the result of each of these will be provided in one single message but in several Result blocks)
• The Manufacturer Information block: this block contains the information about the traceability of the result.
• The Request Information block: This block allows information to be requested in both directions Analyser to
LIS and vice versa. Results or information can be requested about a patient
• The Comment block: this block contains comments. It can be located anywhere in the message before the
end block
• The Message Terminator block: This block indicates that the message is ended

The quality control results are transferred to the LIS when the option is selected (see 3-10-3- Transferring
quality control results, page 37).
The ASTM message has a hierarchical structure, each block from the lower level refers to the block from the
level immediately above, except for the comments blocks.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 19

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-1- General information (continued)

The structure of the ASTM message is the following for this version of protocol:

Header
Patient 1
Order 1
Result 1
Comment 1
Manufacturer 1
…….
Result n
Comment 1
Manufacturer 1
……..
Order n
Result 1
Comment 1
Manufacturer 1
…….
Result n
Comment 1
Manufacturer 1
Message Terminator

Example of an ASTM message:

H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|4|20111124135800
P|1||20105863||BONTEMPS^Robert||19500226|M|||||DUPONT|||||Comment||||||||||||||
Radiology
O|1|01^7148345||^^^25OHD|R||||||A||||S||||||||||O
R|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|63,9|ng/mL|10,0 to 100,0|N||F||||20111123171733|IDS-
iSYS B300B0378
C|1|I|FOR, MRE!|N
M|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|51||25OHD^0952^209525602987^20120229|System
Liquid^72634^00162^20121209\Cuvettes^18121^02177^20120506|
TRIGB^70245^00049^20130203\TRIGA^70244^00200^20130203\Wash
S^72508^00322^20121104\Wash1^2\Wash2\Wash3\DSORB
L|1|N

! A blue italic font identifies the differences with Compatible ASTM in the description of the
various fields of each block.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 20

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-2- The Header Block

H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|4|20111124135800
This block is the first in the message, and is the one which defines its characteristics.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type H Fixed value H to indicate a Header block.
Delimiters Definition |\^_ Definitions of the delimiters that will be used in the
message. These are the 4 characters which follow
the H, with the following being initialized:
• The field delimiter ( I ) which separates the various
fields.
• The repeat delimiter ( \ ) which separates a
repetition in a field.
• The component delimiter ( ^ ) which separates
the various components of the field.
• The escape delimiter ( _ ) which indicates an
escape sequence for dealing with special
characters.
N.B. The record delimiter is fixed and is always the
character ASCII 13 (carriage return).
Message Control ID Not used.
Access Password Not used.
Sender Name or ID IDS-iSYS B300B0378 Name or identifier of the issuer:
•Not used in the direction LIS => analyser.
•Fixed at IDS-iSYS + Serial number in the direction
device to LIS.
Sender Street Address Not used.
Reserved Field
Sender Telephone Number Not used.
Characteristics of Sender Not used.
Receiver ID Not used.
Comment or Special Not used.
Instruction

Processing ID P Type of message fixed at P for Production.

Version No. 4 Version of the protocol, always equal to 4 (in the
direction IDS-iSYS to LIS).
Date and Time of Message 20111124135800 Date of message in the format
YYYYMMDDHHmmss.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 21

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-3- The Patient Block

P|1||20105863||BONTEMPS^Robert||19500226|M|||||DUPONT|||||Comment||||||||||||||
Radiology
This block represents the information relating to a patient.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type P Fixed value P to indicate a Patient block.
Sequence Number 1 Number of the Patient block in the message starts
at 1 and is increased for each block in the
message.
Practice Assigned Patient ID Not used.
Laboratory Assigned Patient 20105863 PID.
ID

Patient ID # Not used.

Patient Name BONTEMPS^Robert Field consisting of 5 components last name, first
name, initials, suffix and title.
Only the first 2 fields are used.
When sending a control from IDS-iSYS to LIS, the
first component in the field will be used for the
name of control.
Mother’s Maiden Name Not used.
Birth Date 19500226 Date of birth in format YYYYMMDD.
Patient Sex M Reference of patient values:
• M for Man.
• F for Woman.
• E for Child.
• U for others.

In the direction LIS=>IDS-iSYS:

•M for Man.
•F for Woman.
•U for Child.
•U for others.
Patient Race Not used.
Patient Address Not used.
Reserved Field Not used.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 22

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-3- The Patient Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Patient Telephone Number Not used.
Attending Physician ID DUPONT Name of doctor associated with profile.
Special Field 1 This field allows to define the profile type sent.
This field can take the values:
• NULL for a patient
• 02 for a control
Special Field 2 Not used.
Patient Height Not used.
Patient Weight Not used.
Patient Known or Suspected Comment Comment associated with profile.
Diagnosis
Patient Active Medication Not used.
Patient Diet Not used.
Practice Field 1 Not used.
Practice Field 2 Not used.
Admission and Discharge Not used.
Dates
Admission Status Not used.
Location Not used.
Nature of Alternative Not used.
Diagnostic Code
Alternative Diagnostic Code Not used.
Patient Religion Not used.
Marital Status Not used.
Isolation Status Not used.
Language Not used.
Hospital Service Radiology Department associated with the profile.
Hospital Institution Not used.
Dosage Category Not used.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 23

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-4- The Order Block

O|1|01^7148345||^^^25OHD|R||||||A||||S||||||||||O
This block represents the information about one or several test requests for a patient.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID O Fixed value O for indicating an Order block.

Sequence Number 1 Number of the order within the Patient block starts
at 1 and is increased for each Order block in the
message.
Container and Specimen ID 01^7148345 This field consists of 2 components:
• The type of container used for the sample
(2 digits).
• 01 PT_11_4.5 mL.
• 02 PT_13_6 mL.
• 03 ST_13_5 mL H.
• 05 Cup 500 µL.
• 06 Cup 2 mL.
• 07 PT_16_10 ml.
• 08 to 17 for configurable containers.
PT for Primary Tube; ST for Secondary Tube
For correct functioning of the apparatus, it is
important to allocate the correct type of container
used for the sample.
If this component is null, the default container type
defined for the tray will be used.
• The SID of the profile concerned by the request.
Instrument Specimen ID Not used.

Universal Test ID ^^^25OHD This ASTM field consists of 5 components:

• Universal test ID.
• Universal test ID Name.
• Universal test ID Type.
• Manufacturer’s Code.
• Sample type (patient or control)
In the direction LIS => IDS-ISYS, only the
Manufacturer’s code is used and this last
component will be entered with the unique IDS-
iSYS identifier of the analyte.
In one single order it is possible to specify several
tests by adding a repeat delimiter and by then
adding one or several UTI thus obtaining a chain of
the type ^^^25OHD\^^^BAP.
Multiple requests of the same test can also be made:
^^^25OHD\^^^25OHD
In the direction IDS-ISYS => LIS, the last
component will be NULL for a patient or equal to
02 for a control.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 24

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-4- The Order Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Priority R This field may contain the values:
• S = STAT.
• A = ASAP.
• R = Routine.
• C = Callback.
• P = Preoperative.
For the device, only S has any influence, the
passage of the associated profile into Urgent, and
the other values are ignored.
Requested/Ordered Not used.
Date and Time
Specimen Collection Not used.
Date and Time
Collection End Time Not used.

Collection Volume Not used.

Collector ID Not used.

Action Code A Action to be carried out on the block test or tests.

This field may contain the values:
• A for Add.
• C for Cancel.
• N for New.
• P for Pending.
• Q for QC.
For the device, A and N are managed in the same
way (new request or new rerun), C (cancellation of
a request) can be managed if the test is not in
progress. P and Q are not managed.
Danger Code Not used.

Relevant Clinical Information Not used.

Date and Time Not used.

Specimen Received

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 25

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-4- The Order Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Specimen Descriptor S This field consists of two sections:
• The sample type which can take for the IDS-
iSYS the following values:
• U = Urine.
• S = Serum.
• O = Other.
• The sample source (place where the sample
was taken) is not used.

Ordering Physician Doctor

Physician Telephone Not used.
Number
User Field 1 Not used.

User Field 2 Not used.

Laboratory Field 1 Not used.

Laboratory Field 2 Not used.

Date and Time Result Not used.

Reported or Last Modified
Instrument Charge to Not used.
Computer System
Instrument Section ID Not used.

Report Type O This field may take the values:

• O = Order.
• C = Correction.
• P = Preliminary results.
• F = Final results.
• X = Cancel.
• I = Instrument pending (in response to a
request).
• Y = No order on record for this test
(in response to a request).
• Z = No record for this patient
(in response to a request).
• Q = Response to a request.
In the device, C is managed when a clot is
detected on a sample (see page 66).
Reserved Field Not used.
Location or Ward of Not used.
Specimen Collection
Nosocomial Infection Flag Not used.
Specimen Service Not used.

Specimen Institution Not used.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 26

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-5- The Result Block

R|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|63,9|ng/mL|10,0 to 100,0|N||F||||20111123171733|IDS-iSYS
B300B0378
This block represents the information sent through by the IDS-iSYS to the LIS after a test has been carried out
for a patient.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID R Fixed value R for indicating a Result block.
Sequence Number 1 The number of the result within the Patient block
begins at 1 and is increased for each Result block
in the message.
Universal Test ID ^^^25OHD^04^F^1 This ASTM field consists of 8 components:
- Universal test Id : forces NULL
- Universal test Id Name: forces NULL.
- Universal test Id Type: forces NULL.
-Manufacturer’s Code: contains the unique
IDS-iSYS identifier for the analyte.
-Test type: 02 for a control, 04 for a patient
-Result type: F for final, P for partial.
-Replicate number: 1, 2,up to 10
-Control identifier, defined as follow:
• 21 for a control Level 1
• 22 for a control Level 2
• 23 for a control Level 3
• 24 for a control Level 4
For a patient,this component is NULL.
-Dilution rate: NULL if not applicable.

Data or Measurement Value 63,9 The value in the form of ASCII chain.
Results which cannot be calculated are sent in the
format * * * * * . Each character * is separated by a
space.If the value is outside the measuring range,
is transmitted in this field:
• < Low limit of the sample measurement range,
when the result is below the measuring range
• > High limit of the sample measurement range,
when the result is above the measuring range
(For 25OHD: <5 or >140)

Units ng/mL Blocks used

Reference Range 10,0 to 100,0 Normal reference values used for the patient sent
through in the form of an ASCII chain.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 27

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-5- The Result Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Result abnormal Flags N This field may take the values:
• L = Below low normal.
• H = Above high normal.
• LL = Below alarm low.
• HH = Above alarm high.
• < of absolute low (Field of measurement).
• > of absolute high (Field of measurement).
• N = Normal.
• A = Abnormal.
• U = Significant change Up.
• D = Significant change Down.
• B = Better.
• W = Worse.
L, H, <, >, A and N are managed by IDS-iSYS.
All associated messages are sent in a Comment
block.
Nature of Abnormality Testing S This field forces S or A for the IDS-iSYS can take
the values:
• A = Age.
• S = Sex.
• R = Race.
And is able to provide an indication about the
bases on which the values of normality were
determined.
Result Status F This field forces to F or P (replicate) on the IDS-
iSYS can take the following values:
•C = Correction.
•P = Preliminary results.
•F = Final results.
•X = Request not honored.
•I = Results pending.
•S = Partial results.
Date of change in Instrument Not used.
Normative Values
Operator ID Not used.
Date and Time Test Started Not used.
Date and Time Test 20111123171733 Date and time of result of test on the GUI.
Completed
Instrument Identification IDS-iSYS B300B0378 Name of device + Serial number.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 28

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-6- The Comment Block

C|1|I|FOR, MRE!|N
This block represents a comment.
This type of block can be inserted after a Result Block. Depending on configuration, several Comment blocks
can be sent.
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID C Fixed value C for indicating a Comment block.
Sequence Number 1 Number of the comment begins at 1 and is
increased for each comment block in the
message.
Comment Source I Issuer can take the following values:
• P = Practice.
• L = computer system in the direction LIS.
• I = Instrument.
Comment Text FOR, MRE! If the field Comment Type takes the value N, this
field contains the message associated with a
result.
Comment Type N Type of comment. This field can take the values:
• G = Generic comment (any permitted).
• T = Test name comment.
• P = Positive test comment.
• N = Negative test comment.
• I = Instrument flags comment.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 29

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-7- The Manufacturer Information Block

M|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|51||25OHD^0952^209525602987^20120229|System
Liquid^72634^00162^20121209\Cuvettes^18121^02177^20120506|
TRIGB^70245^00049^20130203\TRIGA^70244^00200^20130203\Wash
S^72508^00322^20121104\Wash1^2\Wash2\Wash3\DSORB

This block contains traceability information sent by IDS-iSYS to the LIS, and follows a Result block.

Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID M Fixed value M for indicating a Manufacturer
Information block.
Sequence Number 1 Number of the block associated with a result,
begins at 1 and is increased for each
Manufacturer Information block in the message.
Universal Test ID ^^^25OHD^04^F^1 • Universal test ID: NULL.
• Universal test ID name: NULL.
• Universal test ID type: NULL
• Manufacturer’s code
• Test type: 02 for a control, 04 for a patient.
• Result type: always F for final.
Depending on the test, a final result can be a
mean value.
• Replicate number: 1, 2, up to 10

• Control identifier, defined as follow:

• 21 for a control Level 1

• 22 for a control Level 2
• 23 for a control Level 3
• 24 for a control Level 4
For a patient, this component is NULL.
• Dilution rate: NULL if not applicable.

Assay type 51 This field can take the values:

• 51 for Immunoassays,

• 52 for Biochemistry.

Component information This field will be used only for control transfers.
For a patient, this field is NULL.
For a control, this field consists of:
• target value,
• low value of acceptable range,
• high value of acceptable range
• lot number
• bottle number,
• expiry date.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 30

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-7- The Manufacturer Information Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Reagent traceability 25OHD^0952^209525602 This field contains infomation for each reagent
987^20120229 used in the assay:
Reagent 1^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
Reagent 2^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\…….

Common ancillaries System Liquid^72634^ This field consists of:

00162^20121209\ System Liquid^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
Cuvettes^18121^02177^ Cuvettes ^Lot^Cube Number^Expiry Date.
20120506
Specific ancillaries TRIGB^70245^00049^20 If the field «Assay type» takes the value 51
130203\TRIGA^70244^00 (Immunoassay), the information contained in this
200^20130203\Wash field depends on the option selected in the
S^72508^00322^ CONNECTIONS tab (LOCAL SYTEM SETTINGS
20121104\Wash1^2\Wash menu):
2\Wash3\DSORB •

When this option is not checked, this field consists

of:
NaOH^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
H2O2^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\ Wash
S^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
Wash1^Number of the washer\ Wash2^Number of
the washer\ Wash3^Number of the washer\
DSORB^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date.
•

When this option is checked, this field consists of:

NaOH^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
H2O2^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\ Wash
S^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
Wash1^Number of the washer\ Wash2^Number of
the washer\ Wash3^Number of the washer\
DSORB^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
APSUB^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
WashPT1^Number of the washer for pretratment\
WashPT2^Number of the washer for pretratment.
If the field «Assay type» takes the value 52
(Biochemistry), this field consists of:
Saline Solution^Bottle Number ^Expiry date.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 31

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-8- The Request Information Block

Q|1|^7148344||ALL||||||||O
This block represents a request for information whose origin now can only be the IDS-iSYS.
This request will be used by the IDS-iSYS after discovering a tube for a patient whose profile is
known on the work list in order to request the tests to be carried out on this tube.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID  Q Fixed value Q to indicate a Request Information block.

Sequence Number 1 The request number starts at 1 and is increased for

each request block in the message.

Starting Range ID Number ^7148344 This field consists of 3 elements; only the first 2 are
used by the IDS-iSYS in order to specify the PID
(optional) and the SID (obligatory) allowing the profile
quoted to be identified.

Ending Range ID Number Not used

Universal Test ID ALL This field can either indicate 1 particular test (in the
identifier via its ID cf Test Order block) or request all
the tests via the code ALL.
Nature of request Time Not used in the direction IDS-iSYS=>LIS.
Limit
Useful if LIS => IDS-iSYS with the value R to say that
the date to be taken into account in the event of filter
is the date of the test results and the date of arrival of
the profile (code S).

Beginning request Results Not used

Date and Time Useful in the direction LIS=>IDS-iSYS.
Ending request Results Not used
Date and Time Useful in the direction LIS=>IDS-iSYS.
Requesting Physician Not used
Name
Requesting Physician Not used
Telephone Number
User Field 1 Not used

User Field 2 Not used

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 32

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-8- The Request Information Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Request Information O Potential values:
Status Code
• C
• P
• F
• X
• I
• S
• M
• R
• A
• N
• O
• D
Only the values O and X are managed in the
direction IDS-iSYS to LIS.
A is used when the LIS does not respond to a
request. In such cases, the request is cancelled
(this field takes the value A). The request is
transmitted 3 times, after which the transmission is
aborted.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 33

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-9- The Message Terminator Block

L|1|N
This block is used in order to indicate the end of an ASTM block. It consists of the following fields:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID L Fixed value L for indicating a Terminator block.
Sequence Number 1 Always at 1 as there is only one sequence per
message.
Termination code N This code designates of end of the message with
the following values, depending on the situation:
• N = Normal.
• T = Abandon issuer.
• R = Abandon receiver.
• E = Unknown Error.
• Q = Error in last request.
• I = No Information available for last query.
• F = Last request for information processed. of
comment.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 34

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-10- Line of Communication

3-10-1-Equipment configuration
Communication with the centralized computer system is connected to the PC associated with the analyser and
can be made by:
• RS232C link. DB9 standard pinouts.
• TCP/IP link. Ethernet cable (RJ45,8 pins)

3-10-2- Change to connection setup

The connection set-up for the interface can be found under SET-UP/SETTINGS/SYSTEM:

• With RS232C selected:

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 35

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-10- Line of Communication (continued)

• With TCP/IP selected:

• Configurable options:

The sample container is set with the type sent in the field
«Container and Specimen ID» (see Order Block, page 24).
The user can modify this container type until the sample is
processed by the analyser (blue colour code).

The sample container sent by the LIS is ignored and is set

with the container type defined for the removable rack or for
the fixed tray.
The user can modify this container type until the sample is
processed by the analyser (blue colour code).

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 36

Software version V 14
 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
3-10- Line of Communication (continued)

• Configurable options (continued):

Active for the option «Clot Detection»

When a clot is detected in a sample, results from this
sample’s profile that have already been transferred to the
LIS will be resent (see 7- Important notes, page 67).

Active for the option «Clot Detection»

Results that have already been transferred to the LIS are
not resent when a clot is detected in a sample.

The field «Specific ancillaries» in the Manufacturer block will

not contain the components corresponding to the
traceability of AP SUBSTRATE and washer(s) used in the
pretreatment step.
The relevant field is described in page 31.

The field «Specific ancillaries» in the Manufacturer block will

contain the components corresponding to the traceability of
AP SUBSTRATE and washer(s) used in the pretreatment
step.
The relevant field is described in page 31.

3-10-3- Transferring quality control results

To t r a n s f e r t h e q u a l i t y c o n t r o l r e s u l t s , s e l e c t t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g o p t i o n , i n t h e t a b
under SET-UP/SETTINGS/SYSTEM menu:

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 3- ASTM Compatible V2 Version 37

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-1- General information

The ASTM Compatible V3 version uses the sections defined as follows:

• The Header block: this block is the first one found in an ASTM frame, it defines the characteristics of the
messages as well as the characters separating the fields and components which will be used
• The Patient block: this block contains all the information about the patient such as his or her last name, first
name, PID, etc, and, in case of control transfer, the name of the control.
• The Test Order block: this block defines a test, so it contains the data relating to a test carried out on one or
several analytes. This block is always preceded by a patient block
• The Result block: this block contains the result of one analyte and one alone. It is always preceded by a Test
Order block or by another Result block. If several results are sent through for one test, there will then be
several Result blocks following a Test Order block (typically if a test has been carried out on several analytes,
the result of each of these will be provided in one single message but in several Result blocks)
• The Manufacturer Information block: this block contains the information about the traceability of the result.
• The Request Information block: This block allows information to be requested in both directions Analyser to
LIS and vice versa. Results or information can be requested about a patient
• The Comment block: this block contains comments. It can be located anywhere in the message before the
end block
• The Message Terminator block: This block indicates that the message is ended

The quality control results are transferred to the LIS when the option is selected (see 4-10-3- Transferring
quality control results, page 56).
The ASTM message has a hierarchical structure, each block from the lower level refers to the block from the
level immediately above, except for the comments blocks.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 38

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-1- General information (continued)

The structure of the ASTM message is the following for this version of protocol:

Header
Patient 1
Order 1
Result 1
Comment 1
Manufacturer 1
…….
Result n
Comment 1
Manufacturer 1
……..
Order n
Result 1
Comment 1
Manufacturer 1
…….
Result n
Comment 1
Manufacturer 1
Message Terminator

Example of an ASTM message:

H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|5|20111124135800
P|1||20105863||BONTEMPS^Robert||19500226|M|||||DUPONT|||||Comment||||||||||||||
Radiology
O|1|01^7148345||^^^25OHD|R||||||A||||S||||||||||O
R|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|63,9|ng/mL|10,0 to 100,0|N||F||||20111123171733|IDS-
iSYS B300B0378
C|1|I|FOR, MRE!|N
M|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|51||25OHD^0952^209525602987^20120229|System
Liquid^72634^00162^20121209\Cuvettes^18121^02177^20120506|
TRIGB^70245^00049^20130203\TRIGA^70244^00200^20130203\Wash
S^72508^00322^20121104\Wash1^2\Wash2\Wash3\DSORB
L|1|N

! A blue italic font identifies the differences with Compatible ASTM V2 in the description of the
various fields of each block.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 39

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-2- The Header Block

H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|5|20111124135800
This block is the first in the message, and is the one which defines its characteristics.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type H Fixed value H to indicate a Header block.
Delimiters Definition |\^_ Definitions of the delimiters that will be used in the
message. These are the 4 characters which follow
the H, with the following being initialized:
• The field delimiter ( I ) which separates the various
fields.
• The repeat delimiter ( \ ) which separates a
repetition in a field.
• The component delimiter ( ^ ) which separates
the various components of the field.
• The escape delimiter ( _ ) which indicates an
escape sequence for dealing with special
characters.
N.B. The record delimiter is fixed and is always the
character ASCII 13 (carriage return).
Message Control ID Not used.
Access Password Not used.
Sender Name or ID IDS-iSYS B300B0378 Name or identifier of the issuer:
•Not used in the direction LIS => analyser.
•Fixed at IDS-iSYS + Serial number in the direction
device to LIS.
Sender Street Address Not used.
Reserved Field
Sender Telephone Number Not used.
Characteristics of Sender Not used.
Receiver ID Not used.
Comment or Special Not used.
Instruction

Processing ID P Type of message fixed at P for Production.

Version No. 5 Version of the protocol, always equal to 5 (in the
direction IDS-iSYS to LIS).
Date and Time of Message 20111124135800 Date of message in the format
YYYYMMDDHHmmss.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 40

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-3- The Patient Block

P|1||20105863||BONTEMPS^Robert||19500226|M|||||DUPONT|||||Comment||||||||||||||
Radiology||TANNER STAGE^5
This block represents the information relating to a patient.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type P Fixed value P to indicate a Patient block.
Sequence Number 1 Number of the Patient block in the message starts
at 1 and is increased for each block in the
message.
Practice Assigned Patient ID Not used.
Laboratory Assigned Patient 20105863 PID.
ID

Patient ID # Not used.

Patient Name BONTEMPS^Robert Field consisting of 5 components last name, first
name, initials, suffix and title.
Only the first 2 fields are used.
When sending a control from IDS-iSYS to LIS, the
first component in the field will be used for the
name of control.
Mother’s Maiden Name Not used.
Birth Date 19500226 Date of birth in format YYYYMMDD.
Patient Sex M Reference of patient values:
• M for Man.
• F for Woman.
• E for Child.
• U for others.

In the direction LIS=>IDS-iSYS:

•M for Man.
•F for Woman.
•U for Child.
•U for others.
Patient Race Not used.
Patient Address Not used.
Reserved Field Not used.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 41

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-3- The Patient Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Patient Telephone Number Not used.
Attending Physician ID DUPONT Name of doctor associated with profile.
Special Field 1 This field allows to define the profile type sent.
This field can take the values:
• NULL for a patient
• 02 for a control
Special Field 2 Not used.
Patient Height Not used.
Patient Weight Not used.
Patient Known or Suspected Comment Comment associated with profile.
Diagnosis
Patient Active Medication Not used.
Patient Diet Not used.
Practice Field 1 Not used.
Practice Field 2 Not used.
Admission and Discharge Not used.
Dates
Admission Status Not used.
Location Not used.
Nature of Alternative Not used.
Diagnostic Code
Alternative Diagnostic Code Not used.
Patient Religion Not used.
Marital Status Not used.
Isolation Status Not used.
Language Not used.
Hospital Service Radiology Department associated with the profile.
Hospital Institution Not used.
Dosage Category TANNER STAGE^5 Allows defining the Tanner stage.
The second component of the field can take the
values from 1 to 5 (integral values).

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 42

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-4- The Order Block

O|1|01^7148345||^^^25OHD|R||||||A||||S||||||||||O
This block represents the information about one or several test requests for a patient.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID O Fixed value O for indicating an Order block.

Sequence Number 1 Number of the order within the Patient block starts
at 1 and is increased for each Order block in the
message.
Container and Specimen ID 01^7148345 This field consists of 2 components:
• The type of container used for the sample
(2 digits).
• 01 PT_11_4.5 mL.
• 02 PT_13_6 mL.
• 03 ST_13_5 mL H.
• 05 Cup 500 µL.
• 06 Cup 2 mL.
• 07 PT_16_10 ml.
• 08 to 17 for configurable containers.
PT for Primary Tube; ST for Secondary Tube
For correct functioning of the apparatus, it is
important to allocate the correct type of container
used for the sample.
If this component is null, the default container type
defined for the tray will be used.
• The SID of the profile concerned by the request.
Instrument Specimen ID Not used.

Universal Test ID ^^^25OHD This ASTM field consists of 5 components:

• Universal test ID.
• Universal test ID Name.
• Universal test ID Type.
• Manufacturer’s Code.
• Sample type (patient or control)
In the direction LIS => IDS-ISYS, only the
Manufacturer’s code is used and this last
component will be entered with the unique IDS-
iSYS identifier of the analyte.
In one single order it is possible to specify several
tests by adding a repeat delimiter and by then
adding one or several UTI thus obtaining a chain of
the type ^^^25OHD\^^^BAP.
Multiple requests of the same test can also be made:
^^^25OHD\^^^25OHD
In the direction IDS-ISYS => LIS, the last
component will be NULL for a patient or equal to
02 for a control.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 43

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-4- The Order Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Priority R This field may contain the values:
• S = STAT.
• A = ASAP.
• R = Routine.
• C = Callback.
• P = Preoperative.
For the device, only S has any influence, the
passage of the associated profile into Urgent, and
the other values are ignored.
Requested/Ordered Not used.
Date and Time
Specimen Collection Not used.
Date and Time
Collection End Time Not used.

Collection Volume Not used.

Collector ID Not used.

Action Code A Action to be carried out on the block test or tests.

This field may contain the values:
• A for Add.
• C for Cancel.
• N for New.
• P for Pending.
• Q for QC.
For the device, A and N are managed in the same
way (new request or new rerun), C (cancellation of
a request) can be managed if the test is not in
progress. P and Q are not managed.
Danger Code Not used.

Relevant Clinical Information Not used.

Date and Time Not used.

Specimen Received

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 44

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-4- The Order Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Specimen Descriptor S This field consists of two sections:
• The sample type which can take for the IDS-
iSYS the following values:
• U = Urine.
• S = Serum.
• O = Other.
• The sample source (place where the sample
was taken) is not used.

Ordering Physician Doctor

Physician Telephone Not used.
Number
User Field 1 Not used.

User Field 2 Not used.

Laboratory Field 1 Not used.

Laboratory Field 2 Not used.

Date and Time Result Not used.

Reported or Last Modified
Instrument Charge to Not used.
Computer System
Instrument Section ID Not used.

Report Type O This field may take the values:

• O = Order.
• C = Correction.
• P = Preliminary results.
• F = Final results.
• X = Cancel.
• I = Instrument pending (in response to a
request).
• Y = No order on record for this test
(in response to a request).
• Z = No record for this patient
(in response to a request).
• Q = Response to a request.
In the device, C is managed when a clot is
detected on a sample (see page 67).
Reserved Field Not used.
Location or Ward of Not used.
Specimen Collection
Nosocomial Infection Flag Not used.
Specimen Service Not used.

Specimen Institution Not used.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 45

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-5- The Result Block

R|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|63,9|ng/mL|10,0 to 100,0|N||F|||SYSTEM^SYSTEM|
20111123171733|IDS-iSYS B300B0378
This block represents the information sent through by the IDS-iSYS to the LIS after a test has been carried out
for a patient.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID R Fixed value R for indicating a Result block.
Sequence Number 1 The number of the result within the Patient block
begins at 1 and is increased for each Result block
in the message.
Universal Test ID ^^^25OHD^04^F^1 This ASTM field consists of 8 components:
- Universal test Id : forces NULL
- Universal test Id Name: forces NULL.
- Universal test Id Type: forces NULL.
-Manufacturer’s Code: contains the unique
IDS-iSYS identifier for the analyte.
-Test type: 02 for a control, 04 for a patient
-Result type: F for final, P for partial.
-Replicate number: 1, 2,up to 10
-Control identifier, defined as follow:
• 21 for a control Level 1
• 22 for a control Level 2
• 23 for a control Level 3
• 24 for a control Level 4
For a patient,this component is NULL.
-Dilution rate: NULL if not applicable.

Data or Measurement Value 63,9 The value in the form of ASCII chain.
Results which cannot be calculated are sent in the
format * * * * * . Each character * is separated by a
space.If the value is outside the measuring range,
is transmitted in this field:
• < Low limit of the sample measurement range,
when the result is below the measuring range
• > High limit of the sample measurement range,
when the result is above the measuring range
(For 25OHD: <5 or >140)

Units ng/mL Blocks used

Reference Range 10,0 to 100,0 Normal reference values used for the patient sent
through in the form of an ASCII chain.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 46

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-5- The Result Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Result abnormal Flags N This field may take the values:
• L = Below low normal.
• H = Above high normal.
• LL = Below alarm low.
• HH = Above alarm high.
• < of absolute low (Field of measurement).
• > of absolute high (Field of measurement).
• N = Normal.
• A = Abnormal.
• U = Significant change Up.
• D = Significant change Down.
• B = Better.
• W = Worse.
L, H, <, >, A and N are managed by IDS-iSYS.
All associated messages are sent in a Comment
block.
Nature of Abnormality Testing S This field forces S or A for the IDS-iSYS can take
the values:
• A = Age.
• S = Sex.
• R = Race.
And is able to provide an indication about the
bases on which the values of normality were
determined.
Result Status F This field forces to F or P (replicate) on the IDS-
iSYS can take the following values:
•C = Correction.
•P = Preliminary results.
•F = Final results.
•X = Request not honored.
•I = Results pending.
•S = Partial results.
Date of change in Instrument Not used.
Normative Values
Operator ID SYSTEM^SYSTEM Identifying the operators who handled the profile.
This field consists of 2 components:
- Identifier of the operator who creates the
profile; if the profile was transferred by the LIS,
the identifier SYSTEM is sent.
- Identifier of the operator who stores/tranfers
the profile; if the profile was automatically
stored/transferred, the identifier SYSTEM is
sent.
Date and Time Test Started Not used.
Date and Time Test 20111123171733 Date and time of result of test on the GUI.
Completed
Instrument Identification IDS-iSYS B300B0378 Name of device + Serial number.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 47

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-6- The Comment Block

C|1|I|FOR, MRE!|N
This block represents a comment.
This type of block can be inserted after a Result Block. Depending on configuration, several Comment blocks
can be sent.
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID C Fixed value C for indicating a Comment block.
Sequence Number 1 Number of the comment begins at 1 and is
increased for each comment block in the
message.
Comment Source I Issuer can take the following values:
• P = Practice.
• L = computer system in the direction LIS.
• I = Instrument.
Comment Text FOR, MRE! If the field Comment Type takes the value N, this
field contains the message associated with a
result.
Comment Type N Type of comment. This field can take the values:
• G = Generic comment (any permitted).
• T = Test name comment.
• P = Positive test comment.
• N = Negative test comment.
• I = Instrument flags comment.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 48

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-7- The Manufacturer Information Block

M|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|51||25OHD^0952^209525602987^20120229|System
Liquid^72634^00162^20121209\Cuvettes^18121^02177^20120506|
TRIGB^70245^00049^20130203\TRIGA^70244^00200^20130203\Wash
S^72508^00322^20121104\Wash1^2\Wash2\Wash3\DSORB

This block contains traceability information sent by IDS-iSYS to the LIS, and follows a Result block.

Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID M Fixed value M for indicating a Manufacturer
Information block.
Sequence Number 1 Number of the block associated with a result,
begins at 1 and is increased for each
Manufacturer Information block in the message.
Universal Test ID ^^^25OHD^04^F^1 • Universal test ID: NULL.
• Universal test ID name: NULL.
• Universal test ID type: NULL
• Manufacturer’s code
• Test type: 02 for a control, 04 for a patient.
• Result type: always F for final.
Depending on the test, a final result can be a
mean value.
• Replicate number: 1, 2, up to 10
• Control identifier, defined as follow:
• 21 for a control Level 1
• 22 for a control Level 2
• 23 for a control Level 3
• 24 for a control Level 4
For a patient, this component is NULL.
• Dilution rate: NULL if not applicable.

Assay type 51 This field can take the values:

• 51 for Immunoassays,
• 52 for Biochemistry.
Component information This field will be used only for control transfers.
For a patient, this field is NULL.
For a control, this field consists of:
• target value,
• low value of acceptable range,
• high value of acceptable range
• lot number
• bottle number,
• expiry date.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 49

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-7- The Manufacturer Information Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Reagent traceability 25OHD^0952^209525602 This field contains infomation for each reagent
987^20120229 used in the assay:
Reagent 1^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
Reagent 2^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\…….

Common ancillaries System Liquid^72634^ This field consists of:

00162^20121209\ System Liquid^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
Cuvettes^18121^02177^ Cuvettes ^Lot^Cube Number^Expiry Date.
20120506
Specific ancillaries TRIGB^70245^00049^20 If the field «Assay type» takes the value 51 , this
130203\TRIGA^70244^00 field consists of:
200^20130203\Wash NaOH^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
S^72508^00322^ H2O2^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\ Wash
20121104\Wash1^2\Wash S^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
2\Wash3\DSORB Wash1^Number of the washer\ Wash2^Number of
the washer\ Wash3^Number of the washer\
DSORB^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
APSUB^Lot^Bottle Number ^Expiry date\
WashPT1^Number of the washer for pretratment\
WashPT2^Number of the washer for pretratment.
If the field «Assay type» takes the value 52
(Biochemistry), this field consists of:
Saline Solution^Bottle Number ^Expiry date.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 50

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V2 Version
4-8- The Request Information Block

Q|1|^7148344||ALL||||||||O
This block represents a request for information whose origin now can only be the IDS-iSYS.
This request will be used by the IDS-iSYS after discovering a tube for a patient whose profile is
known on the work list in order to request the tests to be carried out on this tube.
Here are the various fields of this block used in the protocol version:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID  Q Fixed value Q to indicate a Request Information block.

Sequence Number 1 The request number starts at 1 and is increased for

each request block in the message.

Starting Range ID Number ^7148344 This field consists of 3 elements; only the first 2 are
used by the IDS-iSYS in order to specify the PID
(optional) and the SID (obligatory) allowing the profile
quoted to be identified.

Ending Range ID Number Not used

Universal Test ID ALL This field can either indicate 1 particular test (in the
identifier via its ID cf Test Order block) or request all
the tests via the code ALL.
Nature of request Time Not used in the direction IDS-iSYS=>LIS.
Limit
Useful if LIS => IDS-iSYS with the value R to say that
the date to be taken into account in the event of filter
is the date of the test results and the date of arrival of
the profile (code S).

Beginning request Results Not used

Date and Time Useful in the direction LIS=>IDS-iSYS.
Ending request Results Not used
Date and Time Useful in the direction LIS=>IDS-iSYS.
Requesting Physician Not used
Name
Requesting Physician Not used
Telephone Number
User Field 1 Not used

User Field 2 Not used

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 51

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-8- The Request Information Block (continued)

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Request Information O Potential values:
Status Code
• C
• P
• F
• X
• I
• S
• M
• R
• A
• N
• O
• D
Only the values O and X are managed in the
direction IDS-iSYS to LIS.
A is used when the LIS does not respond to a
request. In such cases, the request is cancelled
(this field takes the value A). The request is
transmitted 3 times, after which the transmission is
aborted.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 52

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-9- The Message Terminator Block

L|1|N
This block is used in order to indicate the end of an ASTM block. It consists of the following fields:
* The field value corresponds to the above block

ASTM Name of the field Value* Description and use in IDS-iSYS system
Record Type ID L Fixed value L for indicating a Terminator block.
Sequence Number 1 Always at 1 as there is only one sequence per
message.
Termination code N This code designates of end of the message with
the following values, depending on the situation:
• N = Normal.
• T = Abandon issuer.
• R = Abandon receiver.
• E = Unknown Error.
• Q = Error in last request.
• I = No Information available for last query.
• F = Last request for information processed. of
comment.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 53

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-10- Line of Communication

4-10-1-Equipment configuration
Communication with the centralized computer system is connected to the PC associated with the analyser and
can be made by:
• RS232C link. DB9 standard pinouts.
• TCP/IP link. Ethernet cable (RJ45,8 pins)

4-10-2- Change to connection setup

The connection set-up for the interface can be found under SET-UP/SETTINGS/SYSTEM:

• With RS232C selected:

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 54

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-10- Line of Communication (continued)

• With TCP/IP selected:

• Configurable options:

The sample container is set with the type sent in the field
«Container and Specimen ID» (see Order Block, page 43).
The user can modify this container type until the sample is
processed by the analyser (blue colour code).

The sample container sent by the LIS is ignored and is set

with the container type defined for the removable rack or for
the fixed tray.
The user can modify this container type until the sample is
processed by the analyser (blue colour code).

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 55

Software version V 14
 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version
4-10- Line of Communication (continued)

4-10-3- Transferring quality control results

To t r a n s f e r t h e q u a l i t y c o n t r o l r e s u l t s , s e l e c t t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g o p t i o n , i n t h e t a b
under SET-UP/SETTINGS/SYSTEM menu:

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 4- ASTM Compatible V3 Version 56

Software version V 14
 5-List of assay identifiers

The list of assay identifiers

9-3 Listisofobtained in the SET-UP/PERSONAL LIBRARY menu.
assay identifiers
The list of assay identifiers is obtained in the SET-UP/PERSONAL LIBRARY menu.

The list of assay identifiers can also be printed.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Rev H 9- Line of Communication 15

Software version V7.XX

The list of assay identifiers can also be printed.

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 5- List of assay identifiers 57

Software version V 14
 6- Examples of Data Transfer
6-1- Data transferred by the LIS

! Data sent by the LIS to IDS-iSYS are the same for the protocol versions ASTM Compatible
and ASTM Compatible V2.

Request sent by IDS-iSYS and profile sent by LIS

==> :! IDS-iSYS to LIS
<== ! LIS to IDS-iSYS

05 12 2011 à 15:46:39 ==> <ENQ>

05 12 2011 à 15:46:39 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <STX>1H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|4|
20111205154639<CR><ETX>B8<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <STX>2Q|1|^7148344||ALL||||||||O<CR><ETX>89<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <STX>3L|1|N<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <EOT>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <ENQ>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== 1H|\^&|||IDS iSYS Simulator^^2|||||||D|1|20111205154639<CR><ETX>28<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== 2P|1||20105863||BONTEMPS^Robert||19500226|M|||||DUPONT|||||
Comment||||||||||||||Radiology<CR><ETX>4D<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== 3O|1|01^7148344||^^^25OHD|R||||||A||||S||||||||||Q<CR><ETX>A0<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== 4L|1|N<CR><ETX>07<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== 5H|\^&|||IDS iSYS Simulator^^2|||||||D|1|
20111205154639<CR><ETX>2C<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 <== 6P|1|||||||U<CR><ETX>FC<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:40 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:41 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:41 <== 7O|1|01^7148344||^^^hGH|R||||||A||||S||||||||||Q<CR><ETX>59<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:41 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:41 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:41 <== 0L|1|N<CR><ETX>03<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:41 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 15:46:41 <== <EOT>

6- Examples of Data Transfer

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 58
Software version V 14
 6- Examples of Data Transfer
6-1- Data transferred by the LIS (continued)

Request sent by IDS-iSYS without profile sent by LIS

==> :! IDS-iSYS to LIS
<== ! LIS to IDS-iSYS

05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 ==> <ENQ>

05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 ==> <STX>1H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|4|
20111205112520<CR><ETX>A7<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 ==> <STX>2Q|1|^7148344||ALL||||||||O<CR><ETX>89<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 ==> <STX>3L|1|N<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 ==> <EOT>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== <ENQ>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== 1H|\^&|||IDS iSYS Simulator^^2|||||||D|1|20111205112519<CR><ETX>1F<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== 2P|1|||||||U<CR><ETX>F8<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== 3O|1|01^7148344|||R||||||||||||||||||||Z<CR><ETX>B9<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:20 <== <STX>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:21 <== 4L|1|N<CR><ETX>07<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:21 ==> <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 11:25:21 <== <EOT>

6- Examples of Data Transfer

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 59
Software version V 14
 6- Examples of Data Transfer
6-1- Data transferred by the LIS (continued)

Worklist downloaded by LIS

==> :! IDS-iSYS to LIS
<== ! LIS to IDS-iSYS

23 11 2011 à 10:22:15 <== <ENQ>

23 11 2011 à 10:22:15 ==> <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:15 <== <STX>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:15 <== 1H|\^&|||IDS iSYS Simulator^^2|||||||D|1|20111123102214<CR><ETX>15<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:15 ==> <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:15 <== <STX>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:15 <== 2P|1||20105863||ROBERT^BONTEMPS||19500226|M|||||
DUPONT<CR><ETX>FC<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:15 ==> <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:15 <== <STX>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== 3O|1|05^7148345||^^^25OHD|R||||||A||||S||||||||||O<CR><ETX>A3<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 ==> <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== <STX>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== 4L|1|N<CR><ETX>07<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 ==> <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== <STX>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== 5H|\^&|||IDS iSYS Simulator^^2|||||||D|1|20111123102214<CR><ETX>19<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 ==> <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== <STX>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== 6P|1||2011223||DESOILLE^FLORENCE||19800926|F<CR><ETX>E8<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 ==> <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== <STX>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== 7O|1|05^7148346||^^^25OHD|R||||||A||||S||||||||||O<CR><ETX>A8<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 ==> <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== <STX>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== 0L|1|N<CR><ETX>03<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 ==> <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 10:22:16 <== <EOT>

6- Examples of Data Transfer

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 60
Software version V 14
 6- Examples of Data Transfer
6-2- Data transferred to the LIS with ASTM Compatible Version

Results sent by IDS-iSYS

==> :! IDS-iSYS to LIS
<== ! LIS to IDS-iSYS

24 11 2011 à 13:37:26 ==> <ENQ>

24 11 2011 à 13:37:26 <== <ACK>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:26 ==> <STX>1H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378||||||||2|
20111124133726<CR><ETX>60<CR><LF>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:26 <== <ACK>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:26 ==> <STX>2P|1||20105863||BONTEMPS^ROBERT||19500226|M|||||
DUPONT<CR><ETX>FC<CR><LF>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:26 <== <ACK>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:26 ==> <STX>3O|1|7148345||^^^25OHD|R||||||||||S<CR><ETX>78<CR><LF>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:26 <== <ACK>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:27 ==> <STX>4R|1|^^^25OHD|25,2|ng/mL|10,0 to 100,0|N||F||||20111124133726|IDS-iSYS
B300B0378<CR><ETX>92<CR><LF>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:27 <== <ACK>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:27 ==> <STX>5L|1|N<CR><ETX>08<CR><LF>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:27 <== <ACK>
24 11 2011 à 13:37:27 ==> <EOT>

6- Examples of Data Transfer

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 61
Software version V 14
 6- Examples of Data Transfer
6-3- Data transferred to the LIS with ASTM Compatible V2 Version

Results sent by IDS-iSYS

==> :! IDS-iSYS to LIS
<== ! LIS to IDS-iSYS

23 11 2011 à 15:23:10 ==> <ENQ>

23 11 2011 à 15:23:10 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:10 ==> <STX>1H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|4|
20111123152310<CR><ETX>A7<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:10 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:10 ==> <STX>2P|1||20105863||||19500226|M<CR><ETX>22<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 ==> <STX>3O|1|7148345||^^^25OHD|R||||||||||S<CR><ETX>78<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 ==> <STX>4R|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|16,3|ng/mL|10,0 to 100,0|N||F||||20111123152310|
IDS-iSYS B300B0378<CR><ETX>7D<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 ==> <STX>5M|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|51||25OHD^0952^209525602987^20120229|
System Liquid^72634^00162^20121209\Cuvettes|
TRIGB^70245^00049^20130203\TRIGA^70244^00200^20130203\Wash
S^72508^00322^20121104\Wash1^1\Wash2\Wash3\DSORB<CR><ETX>CC<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 ==> <STX>6L|1|N<CR><ETX>09<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 15:23:11 ==> <EOT>

6- Examples of Data Transfer

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 62
Software version V 14
 6- Examples of Data Transfer
6-3- Data transferred to the LIS with ASTM Compatible V2 Version (continued)

Results with messages sent by IDS-iSYS

==> :! IDS-iSYS to LIS
<== ! LIS to IDS-iSYS

05 12 2011 à 12:02:49 ==> <ENQ>

05 12 2011 à 12:02:49 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:49 ==> <STX>1H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|4|
20111205120249<CR><ETX>AE<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:49 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:49 ==> <STX>2P|1|||||||U<CR><ETX>F8<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:49 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:49 ==> <STX>3O|1|2||^^^25OHD|R||||||||||S<CR><ETX>3A<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:49 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 ==> <STX>4R|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|<5,0|ng/mL||<||F||||20111125141601|IDS-iSYS
B300B0378<CR><ETX>A8<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 == Réception ACK (Etat_Waiting_2)
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 ==> <STX>5C|1|I|HDM-, FOR|N<CR><ETX>79<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 ==> <STX>6M|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^1|51||25OHD^894^208944900848^20111231|System
Liquid^72634^00162^20121209\Cuvettes^18121^02177^20120506|
TRIGB^70245^00049^20130203\TRIGA^70244^00200^20130203\Wash
S^72508^00322^20121104\Wash1^3\Wash2\Wash3\DSORB<CR><ETX>46<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 ==> <STX>7R|2|^^^25OHD^04^F^2|<5,0|ng/mL||<||F||||20111125141652|IDS-iSYS
B300B0378<CR><ETX>B3<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 ==> <STX>0C|1|I|HDM-, FOR|N<CR><ETX>74<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 ==> <STX>1M|1|^^^25OHD^04^F^2|51||25OHD^894^208944900848^20111231|System
Liquid^72634^00162^20121209\Cuvettes^18121^02177^20120506|
TRIGB^70245^00049^20130203\TRIGA^70244^00200^20130203\Wash
S^72508^00322^20121104\Wash1^1\Wash2\Wash3\DSORB<CR><ETX>40<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 == Thread Emission Attente 0 pdt 15000
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 ==> <STX>2L|1|N<CR><ETX>05<CR><LF>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 <== <ACK>
05 12 2011 à 12:02:50 ==> <EOT>

6- Examples of Data Transfer

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 63
Software version V 14
 6- Examples of Data Transfer
6-3- Data transferred to the LIS with ASTM Compatible V2 Version (continued)

Quality Control Results sent by IDS-iSYS

==> :! IDS-iSYS to LIS
<== ! LIS to IDS-iSYS

23 11 2011 à 11:59:54 ==> <ENQ>

23 11 2011 à 11:59:54 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:54 ==> <STX>1H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS B300B0378|||||||P|4|
20111123115954<CR><ETX>B4<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:54 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:54 ==> <STX>2P|1||||25DCTL1|||||||||02<CR><ETX>AC<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:54 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:54 ==> <STX>3O|1|207284703325||^^^25OHD^02|S||||||||||S<CR><ETX>34<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:54 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 ==> <STX>4R|1|^^^25OHD^02^F^1^21|13,6|ng/mL||N||F||||20111123115953|IDS-iSYS
B300B0378<CR><ETX>7B<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 ==> <STX>5M|1|^^^25OHD^02^F^1^21|51|12,30^7,87^16,73^728^^20111130|
25OHD^0952^209525602987^20120229|System
Liquid^72634^00162^20121209\Cuvettes^18121^02208^20120506|
TRIGB^70245^00049^20130203\TRIGA^70244^00200^20130203\Wash
S^72508^00322^20121104\Was<ETB>B5<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 ==> <STX>6h1^3\Wash2\Wash3\DSORB<CR><ETX>89<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 ==> <STX>7P|2||||25DCTL1|||||||||02<CR><ETX>B2<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 ==> <STX>0O|1|207284703325||^^^25OHD^02|S||||||||||S<CR><ETX>31<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 ==> <STX>1R|1|^^^25OHD^02^F^1^21|11,4|ng/mL||N||F||||20111123115954|IDS-iSYS
B300B0378<CR><ETX>75<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 ==> <STX>2M|1|^^^25OHD^02^F^1^21|51|12,30^7,87^16,73^728^^20111130|
25OHD^0952^209525602987^20120229|System
Liquid^72634^00162^20121209\Cuvettes^18121^02208^20120506|
TRIGB^70245^00049^20130203\TRIGA^70244^00200^20130203\Wash
S^72508^00322^20121104\Was<ETB>B2<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:55 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:56 ==> <STX>3h1^1\Wash2\Wash3\DSORB<CR><ETX>84<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:56 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:56 ==> <STX>4L|1|N<CR><ETX>07<CR><LF>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:56 <== <ACK>
23 11 2011 à 11:59:56 ==> <EOT>

6- Examples of Data Transfer

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 64
Software version V 14
 6- Examples of Data Transfer
6-4- Data transferred to the LIS with ASTM Compatible V3 Version

Request sent by IDS-iSYS and profile sent by LIS

==> :! IDS-iSYS to LIS
<== ! LIS to IDS-iSYS
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:38 ==> <ENQ>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:38 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:38 ==> <STX>1H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS0000000001|||||||P|5|
20150507153038<CR><ETX>91<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:38 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:38 ==> <STX>2Q|1|^E1S0001||ALL||||||||O<CR><ETX>A4<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:38 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:38 ==> <STX>3L|1|N<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:38 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 ==> <EOT>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== <ENQ>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 ==> <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== <STX>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== 1H|\^&|||IDS iSYS Simulator^^2|||||||D|1|
20150507153038<CR><ETX>28<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 ==> <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== <STX>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== 2P|1||007||FRANCKY^JEAN||19900107|U|||||WHO |||||||||||||||||||||TANNER
STAGE^5<CR><ETX>49<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 ==> <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== <STX>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== 3O|1|01^E1S0001||^^^25OHD\^^^hGH\^^^IGFBP-3|S||||||A||||S||||||||||
Q<CR><ETX>67<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 ==> <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== <STX>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== 4L|1|N<CR><ETX>07<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 ==> <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:30:39 <== <EOT>

6- Examples of Data Transfer

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 65
Software version V 14
 6- Examples of Data Transfer
6-4- Data transferred to the LIS with ASTM Compatible V3 Version (continued)

Results sent by IDS-iSYS

==> :! IDS-iSYS to LIS
<== ! LIS to IDS-iSYS
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 ==> <ENQ>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 ==> <STX>1H|\^_|||IDS-iSYS0000000001|||||||P|5|
20150507155304<CR><ETX>8F<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 == Thread Emission Attente 0 pdt 15000
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 ==> <STX>2P|1||0008||RABBIT^ROGER||19980507|M|||||HOUSE|||||NONE||||||||||||||
ROME||TANNER STAGE^4<CR><ETX>5D<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 ==> <STX>3O|1|E1S0002||^^^00000|S||||||||||S<CR><ETX>42<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 ==> <STX>4R|1|^^^00000^04^F^1|0,03|mDO|0,75 to 1,15|N||F||SYSTEM^SYSTEM||
20150507155304|IDS-iSYS0000000001<CR><ETX>57<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 ==> <STX>5M|1|^^^00000^04^F^1|52||R1^123456^6^20160505|System
Liquid^80408^00265^20161030\Cuvettes^10511^01038^20171224|Saline Solution<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 ==> <STX>6L|1|N<CR><ETX>09<CR><LF>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 <== <ACK>
07 05 2015 ‡ 15:53:04 ==> <EOT>

6- Examples of Data Transfer

IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 66
Software version V 14
 7- Important notes
• The connection with the LIS is initialised when opening the IDS-iSYS application.

• Profiles can be sent by the LIS by downloading of the work list and/or in answer to a request sent by IDS-
iSYS (the two modes are managed interchangeably).

• When a new SID is detected on IDS-iSYS (barcode reading or keyboard entry), IDS-iSYS examines the work
list first of all.

• If the associated profile is not in the work list, IDS-iSYS sends a request to the LIS. The LIS must send a
message in answer to each request.

• If the LIS does not answer to a request, IDS-iSYS will not send or accept a new message.

• When no profile is associated to a request sent by IDS-iSYS, the LIS must send a message containing a Test
Order block with the Report Type field fixed at the value Z.

• In answer to a request, the LIS must send a message containing a Test Order block with the profile and with
the Report Type field imperatively fixed at the value Q.

• The «Specimen type» in the field «Specimen Descriptor» (see Order Block, page 9) must be sent with the
value corresponding to the sample type: S for Serum, U for Urine (in this case, verify that the assay protocol
is defined for this sample type). The type «Other» (value =O) must not be used for Immunoassays.

• In the case of a field containing multiple components, if the last component(s) takes a NULL value, the last
component delimiter(s) can be not sent.

• The exchanges between IDS-iSYS and LIS can be recorded by selecting the option available in the tab
under SET-UP/SETTINGS/SYSTEM menu:

The transfers between both systems will be recorded in a log file, in the interface software folder (folder GUI).
The log must be activated only for a sort period of time, to solve transfer problems.
Activating the log permanently may cause interface software dysfunctions.

• The barcode should contain at least 5 digits for the removable rack configuration (sample tubes identified by
the barcode reader integrated into the sample compartment) or at least 4 digits (except if Interleaved 2/5) for
the fixed tray configuration (sample tubes identified by the barcode reader in the front of the analyser).

• If data sent by the LIS cannot be processed, the message is accepted but the corresponding profile will not
be created in the worklist.

• For system equipped with the option «Clot detection», when a clot is detected in a sample, all the results
previously transferred to the LIS will be resent with a field Report Type set at the value C (correction) in the
Test Order block.
In the Result block, the field Result abnormal Flags is then forced to A.
With the versions ASTM Compatible V2 and ASTM Compatible V3, a message FIB is sent in the Comment
block.

7- Important notes
IDS-iSYS Connection Protocol - Revision N1 67
Software version V 14